英语七年级教案
发布时间:2024-02-06 英语七年级教案 七年级教案英语七年级教案15篇。
不为明天做好准备的人是没有未来的，优质课堂，就是幼儿园的老师在讲学生在答，讲的知识都能被学生吸收，为了防止学生抓不住重点，教案就显得非常重要，教案为学生带来更好的听课体验，从而提高听课效率。你知道怎么写具体的幼儿园教案内容吗？小编特地为大家精心收集和整理了“英语七年级教案15篇”，供你阅读参考，并请收藏本页面！
英语七年级教案 篇1
Ⅰ.教学准备
1．教师：录音机、磁带、图片、多媒体课件。
2．学生：准备一份班级的课程表；制作一份英语课程表。
Ⅱ.教学目标
1．知识目标：
(1)单词：favorite，subject，science，music，math，Chinese，geography，history
(2)句型：—What's your favorite subject？—My favorite subject is art.
2．能力目标：通过本课学习，掌握一些词汇、句型等语言知识，能够运用所学词汇、句型和他人交流，提高英语口语表达能力。
3．情感目标：通过互相谈论喜欢的学科，增进同学之间的了解和友情。
4．文化意识：了解英语国家学生的学习生活，增强跨文化交际的意识。
Ⅲ.教学重点
1．单词：favorite，subject，science，geography，history
2．句型：—What's your favorite subject？—My favorite subject is science.
Ⅳ.教学难点
1．熟练运用所学的词汇、句型表达和交流信息。
2．正确运用本课中所学的表示品质的形容词描述事物。
Ⅴ.教学步骤
Step 1：Leadin
建议1：教师播放各学科上课的画面，问学生分别是什么学科，引出各学科的名称，最后做一个总结。
For example：
T：Class！Please look at the picture.What subject is it?
S1：It's Chinese.
S2：It's math.
S3：It's geography.
S4：It's science.
Then the teacher has a summary：Chinese，m ath，geography，science...
建议2：教师问学生现在学习的学科有哪些，让学生列举出来，从而引出各学科的名称，最后总结一下。
For example：
T：Class！How many subjects are you learning now？What subjects are they?
S1：We are learning Chinese，math，English...
S2：And science，music，history...
Then call some other students to have a sup plement.In the end，let the the students give a summary.
建议3：教师问学生现在学的科目有哪些，找一两个学生来回答。然后教师 和学生做一个看图猜谜游戏。让学生看图，猜猜是什 么学科，最后让学生将各学科全部总结一下。
For example：
T：Class！What subjects are you learning now？Can you say out?
S1：Chinese，math，English...
S2：P.E...history...
T：Class！Please look at each picture.What subject is it？Can you gue ss?
Let the students look and guess.In the end，let the students have a summary.
Step 2：Present ation
建议：教师引导学生将1a中的各学科名称与图画进行配对。
For example：
T：Class！Look at 1a and the pictures.Can you match the words with the right picture?
Call one or two individuals to check the answers.
Step 3：Practice
建议1：教师问学生是否能准确流利地读出1a中的单词，找几名学生朗读一遍。对于读错的单词，教师纠正其发音错误，并领读两遍。然后让全班同学齐读两遍。
For example：
T：Class！Can you read the words in 1a correctly?
Then call some individuals to read.
S1：P.E.，art，science，music，math，Chinese，geography，history.
S2：P.E.，art，science，music，math，Chinese，geography，history.
Then the teacher corrects their pronunciation mistakes，and then has a leading reading.
In the end，let all the students read the words collectively.
建议2：教师领读两遍，然后将全班同学分成三组或四组，组织一次朗读比赛，看哪一组读得好。最后进行一个看图抢答游戏，看谁说得又对又快，奖励说得又对又快的学生。
For example：
T：Class！Let's practice readi ng the words.Please read the words after me.
Then the teacher has a leading reading.The students follow the teacher.
T：Class！Now，let's play a guessing game.Look at the pictures and rush to say out the subjects.Award the students who said correctly and quickly.
Step 4：Leadin
建议：教师问学生是否能熟练说出1a中的单词，告诉学生将进行一次听力测验，以检验学生是否完全掌握1a中的单词。
For example：
T：Class！Have you grasped the words of the subjects in 1a？Now let's have a test.
Then let the students listen to the conversations in 1b.
Step 5：Consolidation
建议：教师将听力原文投放在屏幕上，把重点单词去掉。让学生再听一遍录音，填出单词，补全对话。
For example：
T：Class！Look at the listening text.Listen to the tape again，write out the missing words.
After listening，call one or two individuals to check the answers.See how well they did.
Step 6：Practice
建议1：教师让学生大声读一遍听力原文，问学生是否有不理解的地方。如果有，教师给予点拨讲解。
For example：
T：Class！Please read the listening text aloud.
Then let the students read for some time.
T：Class！Do you have anything that you don't understand?
If they have，have a brief explanation.
建议2：让学生熟读几遍1b中的对话，找几名学生朗读对话，看看读得怎么样。教师给予语音、语调、语气等方面的指导和纠正。然后将全班学生分成两大组，练习对话，看看哪一组说得好。
For example：
T：Class！Please read the conversations aloud by yourselves.Then I'll ask some of you to read.
After reading，the teacher corrects th e mistakes about their pronunciation.And tell the students what tones and intonations they should use.
T：Class！Let's practice the conversations between groups.See which group will say better.
Group A：What's your favorite subject?
Group B：My favorite subject is...
Group A：Why do you like...?
Group B：Because it's...
建议3：教师让学生自己熟读几遍对话，然后让学生两人合作表演对话。
For example：
T：Class！First，please read the conversations aloud by yourselves.Next，please practice performing the conversations in pairs.Then I'll call some of you to act out.
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S2：My favorite subject is...
S1：Why do you like...?
S2：Because it's...
Step 7：Leadin
建议：由步骤6谈论的内容自然过渡到问学生最喜欢什么学科以及喜欢的原因。
For example：
T：Class！Just now we talked about some people's favorite subjects.
What about you？What's your favorite subject？Can you talk about it?
S1：My favorite subject is...
T：Why do you like...?
S1：Because it's...
Then call some individuals to practice with the teacher in the same way.
Step 8：Practice
建议1：通过步骤7的导入，引出要练习的句型。让学生两人合作编对话，并进行表演。比一比哪一组说得好。
For example：
T：Class！Can you make a similar dialogue in pairs？Then I'll call some of you to act out.
Then let the students work in pairs to make a dialogue.
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S2：My favorite subject is...
S1：Why do you like...?
S2：Because it's...
建议2：做一个“找朋友”的游戏。让学生在班内走动，互相询问喜欢什么学科，找到与自己喜欢的科目相同的人。
For example：
T：Class！Let's play a game—Find friends who likes the same subject with you!
You can leave your seats and go around the class.Ask everyone what his/her favorite subject is.The one who likes the same subject with you is just your friend.
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S2：My favorite subject is...
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S3：My favorite subject is...
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S4：My favorite subject is...
Step 9：Consolidation
建议：教师让学生做个陈述报告，陈述自己喜欢什么学科以及喜欢的理由。
For example：
T：Class！Now let's have a report about your favorite subject and the reason why you like it.You can report like following：
Hello！Everyone！My name is...I like some subjects，such as...But my favorite subject is...Because it's...
Let the students pra ctice it for some time.Then call some students to act out.
Step 10：Task
建议：教师让学生在小组内做采访调查。询问组内每个成员喜欢什么学科以及喜欢的原因。然后找几组同学进行采访表演。
For example：
T：Class！Now in your group，have an interview and make a survey.Ask the members of your group what their favorite subjects are，and the reasons why they like them.
Then call some groups to perform their interview.
S1：Hello！I'm a reporter.Can I ask you some questions?
S2：Yes.
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S2：My favorite subject is...
S1：Why do you like...?
S2：Because it's...
Step 11：Summary
建议：教师让学生自己总结本节课所学的内容，包括单词和句型。
For example：
T：Class！Let's sum up what we have learned in this class.What words did we learn?
Ss：Favorite，subject，science，music，math，Chinese，geography，history.
T：What sentences did we learn?
Ss：What's your favorite subject？My favorite subject is art.
Step 12：Homework
1．和你的同伴讨论各自喜欢什么学科以及喜欢的原因，编成对话并表演。
对话模式：
S1：What's your favorite subject?
S2：My favorite subject is...
S1：Why do you like...?
S2：Because it's...
2．调查你周围的同学，问问他们喜欢什么学科。作好记录，制成表格。
Names Favorite subjects
板书设计
Unit 9 My favorite subject is science.
Section A 1a1c
Words Sentences
favorite，subject，science，music，math，Chinese，geography，history —What's your favorite subject?
—My favori te subject is science.
备课资料
知识讲解
1．表示学科的名词，有几个单词首字母要大写，因为它们是专有名词。例如：Chinese，English，P.E.
2．—What's your favorite subject?
—My favorite subject is art.
favorite表示“最喜欢的”。
—What's your favorite sport？—My favorite sp ort is basketball.
—What's your favorite food？—My favorite food is hamburger.
3． What's your favorite subject？(同义句)
→What subject do you like best?
My favorite subject is art.(同义句)
→ I like art best.
英语七年级教案 篇2
1．理解作者的精神体验一一“物外之趣”。
2．领悟作者的奇思妙想，学会观察事物和运用各种修辞手法。
（1）、教师出示几幅天真可爱的儿童的图画，引起同学们对童年的回忆。
（2）、激发学生的兴趣，调动学生的积极性，教师请同学们讲述自己童年的趣事。
（3）、教师设计问题引入课文，每位同学都有自己的美好童年，你们想过怎样将他们表达出来吗？那么，我们今天就一起来学习一下沈复的《童趣》，看看作者是如何描述他的童年的。
教师引导：第一自然段和最后一自然段全班齐读，第二、三自然段分别由男生和女生来读。
（2）、引导学生把握文章的关键词“趣”，得出文章是围绕“趣”字展开的。第一自然段总写童年时有物外之趣，第二、三、四自然段分别写到观蚊之趣，观土墙、花台之趣，观虫斗驱蛤蟆之趣。
A、能张目对日，明察秋毫（秋毫，鸟类到了秋天，重新生出来的非常纤细的羽毛。后用来比喻最细微的事物。
例如：①、第二自然段通过想象和联想将蚊子和白鹤联系起来。
②、第三自然段运用了比喻的手法，由一事物联想到另外一事物。
③、第四自然段运用了夸张的手法把蛤蟆说成是庞然大物。
（4） 教师总结，让同学们学会观察事物，学会联想和想象，学会运用各种修辞手法
（5） 请同学们运用今天所学的各种写作技巧写一篇以“童话”为话题的短文
英语七年级教案 篇3
教学目标：
1、了解朗读诗歌的基本要求，做到读音准确，停顿恰当，能初步读出语气。
2、整体感知诗歌内容。
3、品味重点词语的深层含义，领会全诗所阐述的人生哲理。
4、树立理想，并培养为实现理想而不懈奋斗的精神。
2、品味重点语句的深层含义。
3、领会全诗所阐述的人生哲理。
每个人在童年时代，对生活，都有美好而奇妙的“梦想”，对未来，都有热烈的企盼与遐思。那么，生活在大山深处的孩子，他们又在想些什么呢?他们的想法，给我们又会带来什么启示呢?
今天，我们学习诗歌《在山的那边》，和山里的孩子一起，去探寻山外那美好的世界。
1. 给加点的字注音。
2. 形似字辨析。
3. 解释词语。
1范读课文，可播放背景音乐。
b.理解诗中‘‘山’’与‘‘海’’的意思。
2组织学生讨论“山”与“海”在诗中的意思。
学生刚刚接触合作讨论的方式，能说对大意就行。老师要以鼓励为主，即使说的不全面、不深刻也无妨，后面还要引导深入探究。
3学生练习集体朗读课文。
[教师指导]
先给诗句划分朗读节奏。b.再挑选意义重音。
以上两点是教给学生最基本的朗读方法，掌握了朗读节奏与重音，可以帮助学生理解诗句意义。教师可以以几个诗句为例，然后让学生讨论、自己划出节奏及意义重音即可。
1. 了解本文的结构特点;
2. 培养学生复述课文的能力，指导学生有感情地朗读课文;
3. 引导学生正视困难并积极地克服困难。
1. 培养学生复述课文的能力;
2. 引导学生正视困难并积极地克服困难。
1. 师出示名言，生齐读：
上节课我们学习了诗歌《在山的那边》，明白了在通往理想的道路上布满了艰难险阻，其实，不只是在通往理想的道路上，人生处处都会有坎坷。那么，面对困难，我们该怎么办，是放弃呢还是迎上去呢?今天，我们来学习美国作家莫顿?亨特的文章《走一步，再走一步》，看看作者是如何克服困难的，并希望同学们在学完这篇文章后，能够从中受到一些有关人生方面的启迪。
1. 找一位学生读“读一读写一写”中的字词;生领读;师纠正。
学生先大声朗读课文，然后分组讨论下列问题：
(1)品读、欣赏课文,感受课文委婉轻柔、自然流畅的风格。
(2)了解先抑后扬及由事物引发哲理的写作方法。
(3)体悟生命的意义,引导积极、认真对待生命的态度。
2、难点: 了解本文由一个具体细小的物引出抽象深刻的哲理的特点。
2、查阅资料,了解作者生平:
英语七年级教案 篇4
一般过去时表示过去某一时间内发生的动作或存在的状态。
一般过去时肯定句的构成形式是：
要掌握一般过去时，首先要掌握动词过去式的变化规则：
1、动词be的变化：
2、助动词d的变化：d → did (在过去时里助动词d没有人称和数的'变化)
3、实义动词的变化：
实义动词分规则变化和不规则变化。
规则变化有以下几种：
（1）一般情况下在动词后加-ed。
（2）以不发音的e结尾的词，在词尾加-d。
（3）以一个元音加一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节结尾的单词，要先双写这个辅音字母，再加-ed。X b 1.c
e.g. stp—stpped drp—drpped plan—planned
（4）以辅音字母加结尾的单词，先改为i，再加-ed。
不规则变化需要按一定的规律逐个记忆。（同学们可以找一个不规则动词表，利用空余时间自己把它记下来，这对以后的学习会有很大的帮助。）
※在本单元中出现的不规则动词有以下几个：
英语七年级教案 篇5
boy girl teacher queen doctor nurse student police officer bus driver worker businessman
家人：
mother father son daughter sister brother
二物品：
book ,chair, desk, pen, pencil, pencilcase, marker, blackboard, school, birthday cake and candles, birthday gifts,birthday party
三 26个英文字母配词：
apple book cat door eraser fish girl hand ice cream juice key lion mouth nose orange pencil queen rose school teaumbrella vegetables window X-ray yellow zoo
四数字：
one two three four five six seven eightnine ten
五颜色：
red yellow blue pink orange purple greenblack white brown blond
六动词：
直接加ing open(opening) sing(singing)draw(drawing) cry(crying) talk(talking) laugh(laughing) play(playing)jump(jumping) reach(reaching) work(working) eat(eating) stand(standing)
去e+ing：close(closing) write(writing)
双写最后一个字母+ing：cut(cutting) sit(sitting)
八形容词：
happy sad, cold hot, cool warm, long short,tall short, straight curly, old young, big little, tired, handsome, beautiful,pretty
九身体部位：
body head eye nose mouth ear face arm leghand foot(feet) shoulder stomach elbow knee toe finger
英语七年级教案 篇6
Unit 7 How much are these pants?
第三课时
教学内容:Self Check 教学目标
知识与能力
复习词汇pant，sock，T-shirt，sweater，shoes，color，black，white，red，green，blue，big，short，long，数字10--31；
学习词汇Zig Zag，clothes，shop，yellow，ask，which；学会谈论服装的价格、颜色、大小和长短；学会填写价格标签。教学准备
教师准备
制作能显示本单元重点词汇和句型的课件或单词图片；设计课后巩固练习的幻灯片。
学生准备
复习所学词汇、句型和语法内容，并进行适当的总结、归类；准备几张绘画纸和彩色画笔。教学步骤
一．Presentation: 播放课件或出示单词图片，引导学生进行关键词自我检测，完成自我评估，复习所学的重点词汇，完成第1部分的教学内容。二.Writing 1．引导学生在筑词表上进行筑词活动，引导学生采用分类、总结等各种有效途径记忆单词，完成第2部分的教学任务。Play a game: 通过游戏，激活学生已经掌握的相关词汇。游戏规则：在规定时间内看哪组同学写出的单词多、正确率高。本活动Focus on writing and speaking.小组完成在规定时间内的单词接龙后，小组进行互评，老师从单词写得多少、正确率高低，分别给以评价。老师的评价中渗透着对学生情感和学习策略方面的评价。
3．引导学生阅读第3部分中的短文，根据短文内容填写价格标签，完成第3部分的教学任务。三．Game: Just for fun!引导学生进行Just for fun!游戏活动，复习、巩固所学的How much is／are…? It’s／They’re…等句型和语法知识。四．Homework 1．Recite P46(ad.3)2.Do workbook of Unit7(3)
板书设计
Unit 7 How much are these pants? Self check Words: pant, sock, T-shirt, sweater, shoes, color, black, white, red, green, blue, big, short, long, numbers 10-31 Sentences: How much is/are…? It’s /They’re ….Which shoes?
本课小结
通过单词检测、绘画、调查和游戏等一系列复习手段对所学知识进行系统而全面的复习和巩固，不仅使学生掌握所学知识，更重要的是培养灵活运用的能力；同时教授学生一些记忆单词的有效方法。
英语七年级教案 篇7
Paragraph 1 A:Sin sends Ma a pht and ass Ma t repl.
Paragraph 2 B. Sin wants t be Ma’s penfriend and he gives se infratin abut hiself.
Paragraph 3 C,Sin gives infratin(信息）abut his
schl ,sprts ,his best subect and his drea b.
Paragraph 4 D.Sin tals abut his fail and he.
根据Sin的信，在下面格子里勾出他在信里提到过的信息。
Favurite hbb Other hbbies?
2，阅读第 二段，判断下面的`说法正确（T）还是错误（F）。
1.Sin’s parents wn a Chinese restaurant.
2.Sin and his fail live far fr the restaurant.
3. Sin can spea Chinese and he als can write it ver well.
4, Edwin is Sin’s brther and he is an engineer in Lndn.
3，阅读第三，四段，选择最佳答案。
1，What are the teachers lie in Sin’s schl?
A, rude B friendl C bring D strict(严格）
2，What des Sin want t be?
3, Where is Sin in the pht?
4,Which f the fllwing is NOT true?
A,Sin lives near schl.
B Sin is een n plaing rugb.
C Sin is in Fr One at Waler Schl.
D Sin’s best subect is English.
Fill I 用适当的词填空（一空一词）.
Sin writes a letter t Ma and he wants t be Ma’s____________. Sin tells Ma sething abut hiself.
He’s___ _ears ld. He’s 163 c. He has __ hair and _____ees. He lies plaing best.
Sin has a brther. His nae is . Sin’s brther is 23 ears ld and wrs as an . Sin lives near his schl, s he ges t schl .
He ens plaing rugb and in winter, and in suer. His best subect at schl is . He wants t be ______ ______when he grws up.
Everne needs friends.
Friends are sunshine in ur lives.
u can use:
英语七年级教案 篇8
● 教学目标：
1．复习和进一步使用上节课所学的食品和饮料的名称以及不可数名词“量”的表达。
● 教学用具：
录音机、投影仪、图片等。也可适当准备一些容器，如：碗、瓶子、杯子、茶杯等。还可准备一些方便面口袋、牛奶口袋、易拉罐、可口可乐瓶等常见的一些包装，供上课使用。
复习上节课学过的单词。可采用连锁提问的方式。方法如下：老师让一个同学说一种食品，下一个同学必须说一种饮料。如：第一个同学说rice, a bowl of rice, 下一个同学可说water, a glass of water， 看谁答不上来，老师可以小小的惩罚他一下，等别人说完了让他重复。
教本课新的生词。尽量使用图片、实物和媒体资料。
设计一个两人对话。老师可参照第74课准备一些图片，并贴在黑板上。假定这是一个食品店。两人是顾客，他们走进了食品店，在商量买什么东西。使用以下句型: What would you like for breakfast? I’d like …. and … Would you like …? What about you? I don’t think so. I’d like some cakes and bread. 可将这些句型都写在黑板上，供学生们随时查看使用。可反复练习几组，直至绝大部分同学都掌握了这些句型。
听录音读课文，并可要求两人当堂背诵对话。
设计一个三人对话。图片同上。也可尽量多一些。如有条件可事先布置学生收集一些方便面口袋，可乐瓶，易拉罐等，都贴在黑板上或放在讲台上，供对话使用。假定这是一个食品店。两人是顾客，他们走进了食品店，在商量买什么东西，店里有一位服务员。除了使用以上句型外，适当增加一些： Can I help you? I don’t know. What about something to eat / drink? Here you are.
要求尽量要真实。如有条件也可模拟一个真实的场景。
听录音读课文，然后让学生自己读几遍。如果可以的话，并可要三人当堂背诵对话。
porridge, soya-bean milk, steamed-bread, bread and milk,
Lunch:
Staple food: rice, steamed stuffed bun, and noodles
Non-staple food: steamed fish, meatball soup, stir-fried bean
Supper:
Staple food: rice and noodles with fried bean sauce
Non-staple food: smoked fish, bean-curd soup
填好以下饭卡交给伙食委员或班长。
March 1st, Mon.
单词：
1. The first meal a day is br_ _kf_ st.
2. I’m thirty. I want s_m_ th_ng to drink.
3. Han Mei is ill. Mum asks her to have p_ rr_dge.
4. A: How much is a b_ g of milk?
5. 你午饭喜欢吃什么？
米饭和肉。
_______ ________ ________ like for lunch?
Rice and meat.
6. 我要一些面包，你呢？
I want some bread. ________ _______ you?
7．请喝点水。
_______ _______ _______, please.
Keys: 1. breakfast 2. something 3. porridge 4. bag 5. What would you 6. What about 7. Have some water
Do exercises in workbook.
something porridge fish dumpling fruit piece
What would you like for breakfast? I’d like …. and … Would you like …? What about you?
I don’t think so.
Can I help you? I don’t know. What about something to eat / drink? Here you are.Lesson 74教学设计示例（三）
● Teaching aims：
1．学习并掌握“四会”单词及短语。
2．掌握下列交际用语，并能在餐厅熟练地运用下列句型：
(1) Would you like...?
(2) What would you like?
(3) I like a glass of apple juice/some meat, please.
(4) What about something to eat/drink?
● Key points：
1．掌握“四会”单词及短语。
2．正确、灵活地使用本课日常交际用语。
● Difficult points：
1．句子What would you like for breakfast？中介词for的'用法。
2．I would like的缩写形式为I’d like．
● Teaching methods:
1．继续利用上一课的图片教学新单词。
2．利用微机软件演示本课第二部分的对话。
● Teaching aids：
图片、微机软件、录音机、投影仪。
● Teaching methods：
1．利用图片或实物复习上一课所学的单词。
2．用What’s your favourite food/drink？句型熟悉食物和饮料的名词。
A: What’s your favourite food? ( 头转向B)
B: Rice. What’s your favourite drink? (头转向C)
C: Orange juice. What’s your favourite food? (头转向D)
3．迅速反应练习：教师说tea，并出一个指头，让学生迅速说出a cup of tea．
S2: Five glasses of water.
S3: Six bottles of juice....
1．利用图片教学本课新单词，一边出示图片，一边读单词，使学生迅速掌握读音并了解词义。
2．和两名学生配合，演示下列对话。
T: Would you like some cakes for lunch?
S1: Yes, I’d like some cakes.
T: What would you like for lunch? (问第二名学生)
3．would like表示“想要”，Would you like…？表示客气地征求对方是否想要点什么。回答用I like…如：Id like some meat, please.（展示动画《what would you like.swf》中的常用语的场景）根据学生的情况，有选择地播放动画中的情境一和情境二，以巩固学生对相关交际用语的掌握。
Step 3 Listen, read and practice
1．看影片1-19-2，并跟读第一部分的对话。
2．给五分钟的时间让学生大声朗读对话，并做替换练习。
3．让五对学生在全班演示对话中的替换练习。
1．看动画《what would you like.swf》中的情境三，边看边听对话，播放两遍，让学生基本了解对话的情景和内容。
2．第三遍，只看图像，不放音，通过闪动的东西，让学生再一次理解对话的内容。
3．说明以下句子及短语的用法：
(1 ) Would you like something to drink?
(2) What about something to eat?
1．给两分钟的时间让学生大声朗读对话。
2．两人一组对话。
3．看动画《what would you like.swf》情境三，同学们一起扮演A，由计算机扮演B，或反之。可反复练习几遍。
4．男、女同学分组，分别读A、B，教师读woman，分角色朗读。
1．教师出示所学过的食物、饮料的图片，利用第二部分中的对话，做替换练习。
2．让几组做得好的学生上台表演自己编的对话。
补全下列对话。
B: I’d like_________ _________.(一些饺子)
A: _________ ________ something_________ _________? (来点喝的怎么样？)
B: Yes. I’d like________ ________ ________ _______ ________. (一瓶苹果汁)
Answers: What; some dumplings ;What about, to drink; a bottle of apple juice
1．Do Ex．l给两分钟的时间让学生自读对话内容，然后完成习题，叫一名学生说出答案，集体订正。
2．Ex．2 学生自读对话后，叫几对学生朗读。根据对话，自编一个对话表演。
和学生一起总结本课重点句型：
What would you like for lunch?
Would you like something to drink?
What about something to eat?
完成下列句子，每空一词。
1．现在该是休息的时候了。
______ ______ to have a ______.
2．你想喝饮料吗？来点喝的怎么样？
_______ you ______ ______ drink? _______ _______ ______ to drink?
3．喝点水吧，这水是为你准备的。
_______ _______ water, please. The water ______ ______ you.
4．箱子里有多少块面包？一块也没有。
______ _______ ______ of bread_______ _______in the box? There_______ _______.
5．你早饭想吃什么？我想吃一个鸡蛋，喝两杯牛奶。
______ would you like _____ breakfast? I’d like ______ _____ of milk and ______ egg.
6．请帮助我找到那个穿蓝色衣服的女孩。
Please help me ______ the girl ______ ______ ______．
Answers: 1. It’s time, rest 2. Would, like some. What about something 3. Have some, is for 4.How many pieces, are there, aren’t any 5.What,for,two glasses, an 6.find,in blue dress
1．背写本课单词和句型。
2．自编对话，下节课表演。
3．听录音，模仿语音。语调朗读。
1. What would you like?
I’d like a glass of milk.
2. Would you like something to drink?
3. What about something to eat?
英语七年级教案 篇9
Properties: Computer, Projector, PPT document provided.
Teaching Objectives:
1. Let the students understand the dialogue and learn new words.
2. Go over the Past Perfect Tense.
Language Focus:
New words: British, fail, summit, misty, mist
Useful expressions: disappear into, the first men to do tins, try to reach the top of
Teaching Procedures:
Ask the students to act out the dialogue is provided in Lesson 69-1.asf
Give the students some information and pictures about Mount Qomolangma, and check their homework. Let them speak something about the history of climbing the Mount Qomolangma.
For example:
It was formed 60million years ago and ascends to the height of 8850. Surveyor General Andrew Waugh proposed to name the mountain Everest after his predecessor, George Everest. This name prevailed until today, although the mountain has two local names - Qomolangma in Tibetan, Sagarmatha in Nepali.
Ask the students to watch the flash Because it is there.swf which is provided. Listen the text carefully, and finish the questions:
1. Mount Qomolangma is the tallest mountain in the world. ( )
2. George Mallory is a professional (职业的) mountain climber. ( )
3. Mallory had tried four times to reach the top of the mountain. ( )
4. In 1921 he tried to climb the mountain for the first time. ( )
5. Edmund Hillary and Tenzing Norgay were thought to be the first men to reach the top of the mountain. ( )
6. Edmund Hillary found Mallory’s body in . ( )
Answers：
1. √ 2. × 3. × 4. √ 5. √ 6. ×
Let the students read the text carefully and grasp the main idea of this article. And find out what happened in different years (1921, 1922, 1924, 1953, 1999).
Main idea:
A story about George Mallory’s climb of Mount Qomolangma.
mist [mist] n. 雾，a thin fog made by very small drops of water in the air. 其形容词为misty，比较级为mistier，最高级为mistiest。
wonder v. = question是“想要知道”的意思，它常跟宾语从句。同时它还有“感到惊奇”之意。
alive[E5laiv]adj.活着的，come alive表示“活跃起来”，stay alive表示“继续活着;幸存”的意思。
be busy dong sth 是“忙于做某事”的意思。
Show the film of Lesson 70-2.asf which is provided. Finish the exercises 2 on Page 88, and practise the sentences one by one.
Why Because it’s there is used as the topic of this article? What spirit do this sentence show us? Write something about it.
英语七年级教案 篇10
根据新课标的要求,基础教育阶段的英语教学:要使学生掌握一定的英语基础知识和听说读写的技能,形成一定的综合运用语言的能力。下面为大家分享七年级下册英语的课件，一起来看看吧！
1.学会不同工作的英文表达方式。
2.了解同学父母的工作。
重点词汇：teacher, nurse, engineer, manager, airhostess, lawyer, doctor, clerk, reporter, police
重点句型：1. What does your mother do? She is a teacher.
What does your father do? He is an engineer.
2. What do you want to be? I want to be a teacher.
What does she want to be? She wants to be a singer.
Have some free talks.Ask students these
questions:
How many people are there in your family?
Who are they?
Do you love your family?
Where’s your home?
Show the picture of Pan Changjiang’s family. They are a happy family,learn the word “actor”.Actor is a job,do you know other jobs?
Show the PPT, learn other new words ,policeman,policewoman,doctor,nurse,waiter
Reporter,hospital ,bank clerk and so on.
Do 1a as quickly as you can. Check the answers.
T: I’m a teacher. (Ask one student What do you do?) Help the student answer I’m a student. Then ask several students.
(Point to this girl,ask another student)
T:What does your mother do?
T:What does your father do?
Ask some Ss to answer the questions.
Open your books,do 1b.Play the tape.
Make a survey and report about your group.
Name Mother’s job Father’s job
Play a guessing game.
1.I want to be a d_____ like Hua Tuo.
2.My sister is a nurse,she works in a
h_______.
3.Cheng Long is a famous a____,Gong Li is a
famous a_______.
4.The two boys want to be __________(policeman)
when they grow up.
5.--What ___ you ___(do)? --I am a teacher.
____ ____ he ____?
Make a survey ,ask your parents or three of your friends using the question” What do you want to be?” and fill in the chart.
本节课的不足之处，由于本节课的内容较简单，所以在各个任务环节的难度梯度不是很明显。这样没有为能力较强的同学提供战线的机会，而且本单元涉及的.单词较多，学生不能完全的熟练掌握。所以在以后的教学中还应不断的探索，寻求更大的突破。
本堂课重点学习了有关职业的词汇和如何询问他人从事的职业，课堂效果较好，学生基本能够掌握并运用，较好的完成了课堂教学任务。
1.I want to be a d_____ like Hua Tuo.
2.My sister is a nurse,she works in a h_______.
3.Cheng Long is a famous a____,Gong Li is a famous a_______.
4.The two boys want to be __________(policeman) when they grow up.
5.--What ___ you ___(do)? --I am a teacher.
Unit 4 I want to be an actor.
1. policeman (policemen) 6. --What do you do?
policewoman(policewomen) --I am a…..
2. doctor ---What does he do?
3. shop --He is a …..
shop assistant ---What does she do?
4. waiter ---She is a…..
英语七年级教案 篇11
1.掌握L～P英语字母的发音及书写。
2.熟练this, that 和it 的疑问形式及答语形式。
3.学习确认事物及表示感谢的.日常交际用语。
1.掌握L～P英语字母的发音及书写。
2.熟练this, that 和it 的疑问形式及答语形式。
3.学习确认事物及表示感谢的日常交际用语。
Write the names in the big letters on the blackboard，teach the students to read the names．Then get them to listen to the tape and number the names．Have the students pay attention to your writing names on the Bb．Make sure everyone knows how to write the names．
Give each student an English name．Make them remember it and know how to spell it. Write your name，and one or two others on the blackboard． Ask students to look at the words carefully．Explain how capitals are used in English names．
Ask the students to say out where we can find English words or English names around us and what they are．What’s the meaning of it?
Maybe the students can list a 1ot．If they couldn’t，give them some notes such as WC, NBA，Exit and so on． Let the students try their best to search as many abbreviations as possible．
And get them to introduce themselves to the others with their new English name．All these must do after the students know how to do it．The teacher can give them an example with the help of one student．The teacher can take the dialogue on the book for an example．Practise：
A：I’m Paula．P—A—U—L—A，Paula．What’s your name?
B：I’m James．J—A—M—E—S，James．
B：Nice to meet you，too．
Have students switch roles and repeat．
Copy the new words and Finish off the workbook. (Do entering famous school)
完成课后练习题。
英语七年级教案 篇12
外研版新标准英语七年级下册
Module 8 Story time
Unit 2 Goldilocks hurried out of the house.各位评委好！
今天我说课的内容是：英语七年级下册第八模块第二课时。下面，我将从六个方面阐述我的说课内容。
一．教材分析
（一）教材内容分析：本册由12个学习模块和两个复习模块构成，其中每个学习模块又分为三个单元，每个模块按照教学目标与单元主题，结合任务型教学方法，提供规范、真实，同时又接近学生生活的语言材料，以均衡培养学生的语言技能，进而发展其语用能力。
（二）单元内容分析：一般过去时是本学期教材的一个重点时态，M8的话题是 “故事时间”，主要围绕“金凤花姑娘和三只熊”这个故事展开。本单元是这个模块的第二课时，以读写为主，语法重点是一般过去时和规则动词的构成及其应用。
（三）教学目标
1.语言知识目标
（1）能正确使用下列单词：
pick, little, door, answer, hurry,right,piece, cry, jump
（2）能准确理解并使用下列词组：
hurry out, walk into, be asleep, in pieces, at first, point at, jump out, go for a walk
2.语言技能目标
能用一般过去时给他人讲简单的故事或者事情，能用规则动词的过去式对故事情节描述。
3.情感态度目标
通过阅读童话故事提高对英语的学习兴趣，感受学英语的乐趣。
（四）教学重点、难点
1.教学重点
掌握以下重点句型：
(1)Finally, she tried the small chair.(2)It was not comfortable either.(3)Very soon she was asleep in it.(4)The three bears returned.(5)Goldilocks jumped out of the bed and hurried out of the 教学难点
(1)正确书写规则动词的过去式并能使用。
(2)恰当运用一般过去时向他人讲一个故事。
二．学情分析
1.本单元以培养学生的读写能力为主，兼顾听说，并包括词汇、语法学习活动。
2.学生在M7及M8 unit1中已经接触过过去时，对本单元的时态不会感到陌生。
3.学生英语基础相对薄弱，口头及书写表达能力差，但在课堂中还是很活跃。
三．教法分析
1.任务型教学法：把学生分组，让他们参与讨论，交流，合作从而获得知识，技能，情感体验。
2.视听法：主要通过图片、录音机等多种媒体手段提供让学生看、听、说的练习机会。
3.问答法：老师提问、学生回答，学生互问互答等方式，让学生利用图片进行交流，让学生在做中学，在实践中获得信息，习得英语。
四．教学过程设计（45分钟/课）
(一)课前准备
1.识记词汇：布置学生复习unit1词汇，预习、记忆本单元词汇。设计意图：
让学生养成先预习再学习，培养学生自主学习词汇的好习惯，同时为课文阅读做好充分的准备。
2.猜想故事：上完M8 Unit1后，以小组为单位，让学生猜想Goldilocks 吃完碗里的美味食物之后会发生什么事情。
设计意图：
让学生提前猜想故事的发展，以小组的形式，不仅锻炼了学生口头表达能力和合作能力，又为接下来的文章学习做好了铺垫。
(二)教学工具
录音机，磁带，图片，多媒体
(三)教学过程
1预习检测（4m）
(1)检查词汇预习情况,通过齐读+自读，小组内成员互相检查单词的预习情况，每组抽查一人
设计意图：
提前预习单词为接下来的短文阅读打好基础；
(2)检查学生猜想故事发展的情况，请每个小组长介绍本组猜想结果 设计意图：
通过小组猜想故事发展情节，让学生更好地投入到短文阅读中，更能轻松地体会短文故事的意思。
2回顾复习，导入新课（7m）
（1）情景导入：让学生观察图片，分组复述unit1故事
（2）情景导入：让学生观察图片，师生，生生开展对话,通过谈论图片，提出
问题，为学生阅读短文做铺垫。For example：
T1: What can you see in picture a?
S1: I can see a door and three : What do you think of the bears?
S2: I think they were returning their house.(由于学生还没学过过去进行时，允许其用中文表达)
设计意图：
以图片的形式导入，通过师生一问一答，再到生生一问一答，会大大激发学生对本课内容的兴趣
3多层阅读（10m）
听短文，快速阅读:
(1)完成Activity2
Number the pictures in the correct order.(2)完成Activity3
Match the sentences with the pictures.(3)完成Activity the true sentences.设计意图：
让学生迅速听、读课文，把握文章大意和脉络，培养了学生迅速阅读全文，把握大意，抓住文章主体的阅读技能。
4分段精读（10m）
Careful reading: , 2
(1)Goldilocks tried the three chairs and liked the small, but she was very heavy and soon the chair was ____ ____.She walked into the tried the middle bed, but it wasn’t comfortable and the big bed wasn’t comfortable ___.Very soon she was ___in the small reading: , 4, 5
(2)Then the three bears ___to their walked up to their bear ___at Goldilocks and ___”That’s her!She finished my food and look at my chair!"Goldilocks jumped up and hurried out of the house ____her basket.设计意图：
通过采用任务性分段阅读的方式，让学生详细阅读课文，获取细节性信息。5写作训练(10m)
(1)Use first, next/then, finally to write some new sentences，组员之间检查正误，最后由代表读出来。
(2)根据activity2,让全班同学来想象下，Goldilocks逃出房子之后接下来会发生什么。每个小组选出最好的一篇向全班同学进行展示，小组之间进行互评。
设计意图：通过写作，充分发挥学生的想象力，锻炼学生的协调和合作能力，同时也能在短时间内锻炼学生应用动词过去式的能力。
6总结收获（3m）
(1)让学生再次大声朗读课文的词汇和重点句子。
(2)让学生归纳一般过去时和动词过去式的构成和用法。
设计意图：作为初一学生，学知识要养成思考、总结、归纳的好习惯，这是非常有必要，只有这样才能掌握所学内容的重点、难点，才能为以后更顺利进行英语学习。Homework（1m）
(1)Read and write the vocabulary and the structures.(2)Retell the story of Goldilocks the three bears to your family or deskmate
设计意图：通过复述故事锻炼学生将书面的叙述转化为自己组织、表达的能力,使学生真正做到对所学知识的灵活运用。
五．板书设计
正中：Unit 2 Goldilocks hurried out of the house
左边： piece, in pieces, cry, at first, jump
右边： , she tried the small was not comfortable soon she was asleep in three bears jumped out of the bed and hurried out of the house.六．教学效果、反思
1.利用多种媒体辅助教学，学生的学习兴趣提高了很多，课堂活跃，上课专心。
2.在课堂中，我采取即时评价的方法，极大地增强了学生的自信心。
3.本课以学生为中心，采取自主的，与他人合作的方式，学生的竞争意识和团队协作能力明显有所提高。
4.反思：学生基础相对薄弱，在书写及朗读方面有所欠缺，往往不能流利表达，需要在以后的课堂中，鼓励他们积极参与，多读多写多说，运用到生活中，这样才能有所进步。
英语七年级教案 篇13
Unit 7 How much are these pants?
第二课时
教学内容：Section B 教学目标
知识与能力
Section B主要内容是学习数字10-3l，练习“询问价格”，并学会如何作价格报告。
教学步骤
一．Presentation: 1.在黑板上写出几个电话号码进行询问，引导学生回答：What’s this telephone number?复习数字0-9。
2.在黑板上写出数字10-31或出示数字图片，引导学生朗读，再带读，学习数字10-31。3.Play a game : 设计一组精美、逼真的图片，让学生竞猜商品的价格，以激活学生已经掌握的有关数词的词汇。游戏规则：学生对每样商品的价格只有三次机会；猜对者给小组加分。这个活动Focus on listening and speaking.学生在黑板上记分，老师对竞赛结果及时进行评价.二、Listen 1．播放la部分的录音，引导学生一边听录音,一边重复所听到的单词(数字10-31)，完成1a部分的教学任务。
2．引导学生给1b部分的英语单词写出对应的数字，并找出位置错误的两行，完成lb部分的教学任务。
3．播放2a部分的录音，引导学生根据所听到的内容在la的方框中圈出数字，完成2a部分的教学任务。
4．再播放2a部分的录音，引导学生在图画中圈出Lisa和her mom谈论的服装，并勾出Lisa买的东西，完成2b部分的教学任务。
三．Pairwork 1．播放一段购物的录像，让学生体验购物情境，理解并掌握有关谈论价格的常用句型。同时导入本课的主要板书：How much is it? It's ten yuan.How much are they? They're twenty yuan.2．引导学生展开2CPairwork活动，就图画中的服装进行问答练习：How much is／are„? It’s／They’re„，完成2c部分的教学任务。
四．Advertisements: 1.引导学生阅读3a部分的广告，并填写价格标签，理解广告内容，完成3a部分的教学任务。
2.引导学生根据提供的图画，给一家服装店写一则广告，要求学生了解广告的作用和基本写法，注意模仿3a部分的广告内容，完成3b部分教学任务。
五．Groupwork 引导学生进行Groupwork活动，要求学生分小组表演购物活动，填写买卖清单和价格报告，完成第4部分的教学要求。先引导各个小组写出各自的货物，再把各个小组分成买者和卖者进行购物活动并填写价格报告，最后根据货物价格询问、计算快速准确决定胜者；要求学生运用：How much is／are„?It’s／They’re„等目标句型。六．Report: 假设老师只花100元钱，要给该家庭每位成员准备一份礼物。请每个小组帮老师策划一份shopping list.小组成员分工，集体商议，最后推举一名同学参与组间交流，到讲台上来做汇报。小组代表在做Report 时，其他人员对各小组汇报的内容进行评价 六Homework 1．Recite 3a 2．Do workbook of Unit7(2)3．Write an ad.板书设计
Unit 7 How much are these pants? Section B Words: Numbers 10-31, clothing, store, sale, time, year, again, fantastic, price, cheap, all, each, or, just, believe, come down, yourself, cool, goods, buy, from, sell, buy„from, sell„to Sentences: How much is the red sweater? How much are these black pants? It’s eight dollars.They’re ten dollars.Ad: Do you like/need „? We have „ in(color)at(price)for boys/e down to„.本课总结
本课利用课件或教学图片来展开课堂Pairwork问答式的口语交际活动和小组调查活动，谈论服装并学习询问服装的价格与颜色；同时进行听力训练；通过购物的对话练习教学生学会购物时使用的礼貌用语和如何感谢人。
英语七年级教案 篇14
重庆市110中学 曹 毅
单元整体说明
单元教材分析
本单元是九年制义务课程标准实验教科书《新目标英语》七年级下册中第七单元，本单元的核心话题是谈论人的外表形象（image），因此‘talking about sb’s image’是教学重点。通过对本单元的学习，学生能掌握本单元出现的表示人外观的词组及句型。
单元知识结构
1. 词汇：
名词：hair, height，build，captain，team，bit，joke，person，heard，grasses，mustache，image，winner etc．
形容词：short，curly，straight，high，thin, heavy，etc
2．短语：look like, good一looking，a little bit，etc
3. 句型：What does he/she look like? --He/She is tall．
What do you look like? --I’m thin．
4. 语法：What does he/she look like? --He/She is tall．
What do you look like? --I’m thin．
单元总体目标
1. Master the vocabulary．
2. Master and use：---What does he/she look like?
---He/She is tall．
---What do you look like?
-I’m thin.
单元教学重难点一览
重点 难点
1. The vocabulary．
2. --What does he/she look like?
He/She is tall．
--What do you look like?
--I’m thin． Use the language to talk about sb’s image.
单元学情分析
学生在七年级上册已经学过关于“What does he like?”这一特殊疑问句式，具有了学习本单元知识的认知前提，能自然地与本单元话题进行衔接。谈论人的外表形象是人们日常生活中遇到的话题。故学生喜于用英语表达此类知识。
单元教学建议
听说读写等技能是相辅相成的，而听读是说和写的基础，因此要充分借助听力材料和补充阅读材料，训练提高学生的听力阅读水平。在听读的基础上创设语言情景，加强说写能力的训练。此外，还要充分借用课本描图来丰富学生的写作知识，以提高其写作水平。
单元课时分配
本单元共4课时：
Section A（一）1课时
Section A（二）1课时
Section B（一）1课时
Section B (二) 1课时
Section A（一）
教学内容
Section A 中1a. 1b. 1c. 2a. 2b. 3 Grammar focus
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary：like，look like，short，hair, curly，straight, height，thin，heavy，build
2. Master and use：-- What does he/she look like?
--He/She is tall．
--What do you look like?
-I’m thin．
过程与方法：
学生在以前已学过What引导的特殊疑问句式，已具备了学习本课的初步知识，能自然的与本课知识相衔接。通过例子“I am thin; What do you look like"引人创设情景，让学生有如身临其境，采用学生提出问题，学生回答问题，借助媒体来提高学生的主动性。
情感态度价值观
让学生学会赞美别人。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary．
2、language：What do you look like/ What does he/she look like?
难点
Use the language to talk about others image．
教学突破
对于本课的单词短语通过卡片或图画来引出学习
language: 以相互描述自己的长相特征，借助于课件及图画来引出What does he/she look like?.
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件
学生准备
预习生词和课文
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization 2' Now boys and girls，let’s sing the colors song Singing together 多媒体
Step 2
Free talk 4’ Ask the students to describe his/her own hair Talking in groups
Step 3
Presentation
15’ （用班里的学生为例做下面的练习）
1．what do you look like?
（point to Lili standing now)
Lili：I’m tall and good-looking．
（板书good-looking,师师读两遍）
2．What does Tom look like?（Point to two Ss)
3．Point to other students in pictures （short hair/curly hair/long hair/ straight hair /tall /short /medium height/thin/heavy/a medium build)
4.用卡片出示不同形象的人物图片与学生进行两两问答（仿照lc)
What does your friend look like?
She/He has/is…
5．出示一张与课本相同的图画，学生完成1 a Match the words with the pictures．
This activity introduce the vocabulary)．
（帮助学生做出正确答案．） 学生模仿练习（in Pairs）并表演
What do you look like …？
模仿练（in pairs）并写在练习本上
模仿练习（in Pairs）
What does he look like ...？
He is/has …
（学生看图互问） 课本图p45
图片
录音机
6．Listen 1b．Listen carefully and fill in the blanks and find Amy’s friend? We will listen twice．The first time, just lister．
The second time，listen and fill in the blanks．And say Amy’s friend’s unage．
He's really tall．And he has curly hair.
7．Listen 2a and 26 And find the difference between is and has． 看图模仿并表演
Look at their books
Listen and fill careful-
1y.
Step 4
Practice 6’ Pairwork
Practice the conversation below．Then ask and introduce other person in the pictures. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs （lc/3) 多媒体
放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class
Language: What does he...look like?
He. .. is/has... Grammar Focus. SB
Step 6 test 4’ Self check As above
Step 7
Consolidation
(4’） If you have～good foreign friends，but your friends don’t know them.
You want to intn3uce them to your friends as their pen friends．
Then ask some of them to act out their dialogues．
Step 8
Homework Describe your good friend to your partener and make two dialogues． WB
练习设计
翻译下列句子：
I．你的朋友Tom长得什么样子？2．她中等身材，长长的头发。
3．他长得很高，卷头发。
4．玛丽长得高还是矮？
板书设计
Unit7．What does he look like?
1, What do you/they look like?
I’m short/thin/…
2,What does he/she look like?
He/She is tall/thin/…
Section A（二）
教学内容
Section A中3a.3b．4
教学目标
知识与能力
1 ,Vocabulary：captain．team．popular，blonde．good一looking．a little bit．joke．never. etc．
2、Master and use：How to describe a person，。appearance by using the words and phrases above．
过程与方法
To show several pictures with different persons in them and ask a student to describe one’s appearance of them．
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
The vocabulary and how to use it to describe a person
难点
Use the language to talk about Sb' s imagine．
教学突破
1．对于本课的单词短语仍可通过卡片或图画来学习掌握。
2．利用同一个人的以前的相片与他现在的形象做比较，进行描述。
教学准备
教师准备
课件及学生每人的一张相片．
学生准备
预习生词和3a部分
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
organization 1’ organize Ss by showing a picture of mine taken ten years ago． Let the students guess who was it in the picture．
Step 2
Free talk (2’） Ask the students to describe my photo． The students talk about some changes
Step 3
Presentation
5’ 1 ．Now boys and gins，please take out your pictures（教师从中找几张让其他同学来描述其外观形象）
2.（用课件展示3a部分中的Picture 1）
Introduction：This is my good
friend，Liu Peng．Please describe
him with your partener.
（板书tall, curly, brown hair，a medium build) 学生模仿练习（in
pain;）并表演
看图谈论（in pairs)
并表演 多媒体
放映
图一
3（课件出示3a中的Picture2）给
学生下列提示（板书）然后进行
描述
Name：Xu Qian
Likes：telling jokes
Appearance: short，a little heavy，
beautiful，
long and black hair
4.出示课本图画a, b两部分让他
们读后讨论回答：
1) What does Ma Yan look like?
2)What about Wang Lin's appearance?
（帮助学生具体问答，板书thin，
blonde, good-looking，basketball
team，straight hair．）
5 ．listen and match the descriptions
you hear in 3a 看图描述（in pairs)
并表演
学生自读后展开讨
论回答问题 多媒体
放映
图二
录音机
Step 4
practice
6' pairwork
3b Practice the descriptions of people's
appearance．Then ask and answer
questions about them Ss practice the dialogue in pairs
What does Paul look
like? 多媒体
放映
Step 5
Summary 2' Words and phrases of this class
Language：He/She is short
Step 6 test 4’ 1. Self check 多媒体
放映
Step 7
Consolidation
4’ If you want to introduce your classmate to another one, you’d better de scribe him or her clearly，so you must learn how to describe a person．
step 8
Homework Practice to describe sb’s appearance in English．
本课小结
本节课学习了captain, team, popular, blonde, good-looking, a little bit, joke及brown生词与短语，和描述人外表特点的She/He is very tall-等句式的练习运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练地用英语进行对人外貌的描述。
练习设计
Complete the following sentences：
1，Deng Feiisa ____ （高的）boy．He is the_______the basketball______（篮球队长）
2．Ma Yan is_______and_______（中等个子）. She is________（好看）．
3．She __________（看起来像)his mother.
板书设计
Unit7 What does she look like?
basketball team stop talking
good-looking --What does she look like?
little bit --She is tall
a medium build
Section B（一）
教学内容
Section s中的la.16.2a.2b．2c
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Vocabulary：bald，beard，glasses，mustache，black hair, blonde hair. etc．
2. Master and use：the words and phrases；to describe a person’s appearance actors and ask by using the words and phrases above．
过程与方法
To collect several pictures of famous musicians or students to describe．One’s appearance of them.
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
The vocabulary and how to use it to describe a person
难点
Use the language to talk about Sb' s imagine
教学突破
1. 对于本课的单词短语用图画或肢体语言来学习掌握．
2. 利用名人图片对他的形象进行描述．
教学准备
教师准备
课件图片B部分中的a至b
学生准备
预习生词、搜集名演员或音乐家的图片
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization 1, Organize Ss by introducting themselves
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Ask a student to describe his or her classmate． The other students listen to him or her carefully and guess who it is
Step 3
Presentation 1.(以班上的同学为例来描述其外观形象)
Zhang Lin is short, but he is very heavy, He has handsome black hair.
2.（用课件展示36部分中的Picture 1）
Now boys and girls，watch the screen, please．
（板书1．bald；2．beard；3．glasses；4．black hair;5．blonde hair 6．mustache)
3．领读以上单词
4 ．to show some pictures of famous
musicians or actors
1)Xian Xing 一 hai has black hair.
2)Beethoven has a mustache
3）…..
5.学生拿出自己搜集的图片让学生利用下列词语，板书：beard, glasses, blonde hair, bald对著名音乐家或演员进行形象描述。 学生模仿练习（认Pam）并表演。
看图谈论（in pairs)对应连线。
跟读两边后拼读。看图描述（in pairs)并表演。
学生看图，小组讨论，进行描述。
Carl Nielsen Has a beard． 多媒体
放映
图一
多媒体
放映
图二
展示图
片
Step 4
Practice
6’ pairwork
Let the students practise the descriptions of his or her favourite musician，actor and athlete． Ss describe with each
other in their groups
Step 5
Summary
2’ Words and phrases of this class
Language：Jackie Chen has black hair.
Step 6
'rest … Watch the screen and doing 多媒体
展示
Step 7
Consolidation
(4'） Most of us know some famous musicians or actors，we can describe them using the knowledge we learned in this period．
Step 8
Homework Pratice to describe one of the famous musicians or actors you know in English and write it out．
本课小结
本节课主要学习了bald, beard, glasses, mustache,短语，然后重点是运用以上所学内容描述著名音乐家及演员的外表特征。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练的用英语进行对人外表特点的描述。
练习设计
用每一句中的形容词的反义词填空：
1．My brother David isn’t tall．He is _______．
2，Jonny has curly hair. But his mother has _______hair.
3．Sam is a heavy man. Tom is a ______ man.
板书设计
Unit7．What does she look like?
1．Mozart has a mustache 2．Peisi Chen is bald
3．Novaes wears glasses 4．Strass has a beard
5．Dean has long curly hair 6. Melissa Barnes has long blonde hair
Section B(二)
教学内容
第四课时 Section B中3a. 3b. 3c. 4以及SelfCheck 3
教学目标
知识与能力
1、Match the vocabulary: image，remember，new Seattle，winner，award，etc．
2、Master and use：Using the following to describe other’s image．
--What does he/she look like?
-- He/She is tall．
-- What do you look like?
--I’m thin.
过程与方法
学生在前三个课时当中已熟练掌握了描述某人外表的句型，通过回答的形式引入创设情景，让学生自由回答，大面积操练，并借用媒体来提高学生的学习主动性，以切人交际为主的读写课，会收到令人满意的效果。
情感态度价值观
教育学生要多发现别人的优点，学会友好地描述别人的形象。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1 , the vocabulary
2、Read 3a and 36，then fill in the blanks．
难点
Use the language to write your favourite actor or musician．
教学突破
1. 对于本课的单词、短语通过前几课时学过的单词来引出；
2. 阅读由老师做个别指导与解释，为写作做准备。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件．
学生准备
1．预习生词和课文，并填空；
2．准备几张美术纸和绘画铅笔。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization
2’ Organize Ss by describing other’s image. Ask and answer. 多媒体
Step 2
Free talk 4’ Ask the student who is on duty? Say out to class．
Step 3
15’
Presentation 1. Organize Ss by describing other’s image.
What does 1i Ping look like?
He's.../He has...
2. Ask students to read the magazine article individually.（Move around the room）
answering any questions students may have．）
3. Read the magazing article to the class．And find the difference between the two pictures of Johnny Dean．
4. Point to the blanks in the chart．Describe Johnny before and now. point out the simple answer.
5. 'Ibis article provides guided writing practice using the target language, point out the numbered blanks in the paragraph． Doing this exercises by pointing Ss in the class． 3a
本课小结
本节课学习了5个生词，并运用句型描写人物相貌特征。
练习设计
随堂练习设计
用学过的词汇造句描述人的外表。
个性练习设计
写作Describe your favorite actor or musician.
板书设计
Unit 7. What does he look like?
Pictures Describe sb’s image．
教学探讨与反思
本单元的核心话题是谈论人的外表形象（image），‘talking about sb’s image’是教学重点，同时也是教学难点。通过对本单元的学习，学生能掌握本单元出现的表示人外观的词组及句型，并能运用这些词组及句型描述别人的外表，进而描述自己喜欢的美术家和音乐家（Use the language to write your favourite actor or musician）。
谈论人的外观形象是人们日常生活中时常遇到的话题，故学生会热衷于用英语表达此类知识。因此要充分借助听力材料和补充阅读材料，训练提高学生的听力阅读水平。在听读的基础上创设语言情景，加强说写能力的训练。此外，还要充分借用课本插图来扩大学生的写作面，以提高其写作水平。
学生在学习过程当中已熟练掌握了描述某人外表的句型，通过各种形式创设情景，让学生自由演习，并借用媒体来提高学生的学习兴趣。
同时对学生进行情感教育，要求他们多发现别人的优点，学会友好地描述别人的形象。
英语七年级教案 篇15
今天我说课的题目是M9U1， 我要说的是该模块第一课时。整个说课我将分为七个部分进行讲述，即说教材、学情、教学目标、教学重难点、教法、教学过程以及板书设计。
一、说教材
M9U1外研社版教材九年级上册。本模块围绕Great inventins这一话题展开教学，让学生学会谈论伟大发明。本课的教学内容与学生的生活密切相关，学生有认同感，因此我在在任务设计上，尽量贴近学生的'真实生活，以引起学生的共鸣和兴趣，激发学生的求知欲，充分发挥学生的想象力和能动性，主动自觉滴融入到语言学习中去。
二、说学情
八/九年级学生已经具备了一定的阅读理解和抽象思维能力，但是这个学段的学生注意力还是容易分散的，太枯燥的教学会使学生丧失兴趣，分散注意力，所以我打算采取模象直观的方法结合丰富的课堂活动，抓住学生活泼好动的心理，吸引学生们的注意力，
三、说教学目标
1. 知识与技能：
词汇：学习并掌握学科名称以及星期名称favrite, subect, ath, science, bilg, P.E., because, Mnda, Tuesda, Wednesda, Thursda, Frida等
语法：掌握
yJS21.com更多精选幼儿园教案阅读
七年级英语教案范例
小编在大量阅读中选出了一篇特别有用的“七年级英语教案”，我们将持续推出相关内容以满足您的需求。每个老师在上课前会带上自己教案课件，因此老师会仔细规划每份教案课件重点难点。教案是教师教学计划和教学过程中的参考标准。
七年级英语教案 篇1
单词水平测试三
班级 ______________ 姓名 ______________
1. Only two passengers s ______________ in that traffic accident.
2. He e ______________ to me how the instrument was used.
3. Usually the railroad gives free t ______________ for a certain amount of baggage.
4. She is very good at h ______________ her patients.
5. Some plants in nature have p ______________ roots or fruit, you cant’ eat them.
6. One ______________ (燕子) does not make a summer.
7. My hometown is famous for ______________ (花生) .
8. Smoking is his only hobby. He smokes like a ______________ (烟囱).
9. It is interesting to learn much about the ______________ (生涯) of a great man.
10. The lady was dressed in the latest Paris ______________ (时尚).
11. I am sorry I can’t go because I have an a ______________ with the doctor at three this afternoon.
12. She was going to take part in the party, but an u ______________ guest dropped in on her.
13. May I have your attention, please? I have an a ______________ to make.
14. She was afraid that others would hear her, so she w ______________ the news into my ears.
15. We will do what we can in order to keep the b ______________ of nature.
16. The children got everything ready for the ______________ (庆祝) of their parents’ silver.
17. Mr. Brown has come to China to study ______________ (传统的) Chinese medicine.
8. The students are doing scientific ______________ (实验) in the lab at the moment.
9. The meeting supposed to be ______________ (成功的) turned out to be a failure in the end.
10. Before going to school, all the children are given an ______________ (智力) test.
单词水平测试四
班级 ______________ 姓名 ______________ 分数 ______________
1. The pacific is the largest o ______________ in the world.
2. Sorry to i ______________ you, but your mother is waiting outside.
3. I was late in getting to the station, but f ______________ the train was late too.
4. The lowest t ______________ last night was five degrees below zero.
5. Being kind and knowledgeable, the new teacher soon became p ______________ among the students.
6. We finally p ______________ the peasant to send his daughter to school.
7. They were good neighbors and never q ______________ with each other.
8. She’s bought some m ______________ to make herself a dress.
9. He searched all the d ______________ for the word.
10. In a ______________ the leaves change from green to brown.
11. Can you see the picture ______________ (挂) on the wall?
12. The deadline is approaching. Can I have ______________ (额外的) time to finish my work?
13. They didn’t have a lot of ______________ (家具) when they got married two years ago.
14. People tend to think radios and newspapers provide us with more ______________ (可靠的) information than the Internet.
15. No one else in our class can ______________ (比得上) him in chemistry and physics.
16. I’m not sure whether I can see her tomorrow. She doesn’t come ______________ (有规律的) .
17. It is said that he ______________ (成为) teacher when he was twenty.
18. Yesterday morning the young pot star was found ______________ (谋杀) in her bathroom.
19. It was a long time before they ______________ (恢复) from the effects of the earthquake.
20. We are to meet at the school gate at a ______________ (一刻钟) to eight tomorrow morning.
单词水平测试三
1. survived 2. explained 3. transportation 4. handling 5. poisonous 6. swallow 7. peanuts 8. chimney 9. career 10. fashion 11. appointment 12. unexpected 14. whispered 15. balance 16. celebration 17. traditional 18. experiments 19. successful 20. intelligence
单词水平测试四
1. ocean 2. interrupt 3. fortunately 4. temperature 5. popular 6. persuaded 7. quarreled 8. material 9. dictionaries 10. autumn 11. hanging 12. extra 13. furniture 14. reliable 15. match 16. regularly 17. turned 18. murdered 19. recovered 20. quarter
七年级英语教案 篇2
七年级上册语文知识点教案第一课
开学第一课
欢迎大家来到崭新的语文课堂，上次我们已经接受了小初中衔接的辅导，同学们拿到这本七年级上的语文课本也有很长时间了，已经翻阅过的请举手?你们感觉初中语文和小学语文有什么不同的地方?
今天这节课，我们先不进入我们的课文学习，我们不妨先进行一场进入初中语文课堂的的欢迎仪式，或者说是语文学习的启动仪式。这场欢迎仪式将分为三个主题：一、欢迎大家来到语文大课堂;二、欢迎大家来到语文大乐园;三、确定语文学习的目标。
切入主题之前，我首先要讲一下学习上的要求：
⒈准备四本本子：
①笔记本(学习日志)：每一天都记号日期，记下错题、基础字词知识、上课要求、作业要求、课堂重点内容，来不及先记书上，课后整理，课下反反复复多回顾。
②作业本③听写默写本④作文本⑤课余读书摘抄本 读书札记
⒉准备好语文学习工具书：《现代汉语词典》 《古汉语常用字字典》 商务印书馆
⒊上课要求：
①双手放桌上
②除规定的讨论朗读时间外，保持教室安静，不讲和上课内容无关的话，树立公共课堂的公共意识，上课不认真不守纪律由课代表扣分记入期末总评成绩
③主动答疑：课上完之后，都可以到办公室提出疑问。
⒋作业要求：
按时完成作业，字写端正，第二天到校立即上交小组长，没有做完的(包括听默写没有通过)中午到办公室检查，完成后回家
预习：字词摘录、课文熟读、思考课后问题
一、欢迎大家来到语文大课堂
我们看到幻灯片上特别凸显了这个“大”字，所谓海纳百川，有容乃大，语文两个字的解释是：语言和文字以及语言和文学。它有一个很大的彰显其特色的学习范围，你的视野会变得非常开阔。
初中语文的学习内容：
⒈课文：
现代诗歌、现代散文、民间传说、说明文(科学技术、经济社会)、新闻通讯、人物传记、小说节选、微型小说、文言文、古典诗词。
人物分析、语言分析、情感分析、段落分析、语义分析、自我启发和感悟
⒉语言文字基础：
现代文：注音、字形、多音字、成语、熟语、造句、词义、句型、修辞、语法、标点符号。
文言文、古诗词：文言实词、文言虚词、文言句式、通假字、古今异义
⒊写作：以记叙、抒情、议论文章为主
以上这些是我们三年系统性的学习要接触的内容，由此可见第一即是内容范围上的大，跨越古今、国别，现代性、古典性、启蒙性、社会性相杂糅。第二则是学习效用之大，小学时你们的老师肯定说过，学好语文就意味着为其他学科的审题解答奠定基础，语言文字是人类沟通交流最基本的条件，在一些思想家比如卢梭看来，语言文字认识和接受的不平等是人类不平等的起源之一，语言被划为了贵族语言和平民语言，文字只有少数人才能掌握，导致了人类的贵贱有别，而我们现代教育的语文学习即是要打破这种不平等，要每个人都掌握相同的语言文字运用才能，获得人类文明中平等的认知权、沟通权和思考权。
二、欢迎大家来到语文大乐园
下面我们来继续探讨语文学习的第二个主题，我们学习语文的概念，不仅仅局限在简单地阅读分析课文，写命题考场作文，以及反复的做题上，这是理科的学习方法。语文学习在课堂外有很大的延伸空间，这就是所谓的大乐园主题。学习应该是充满乐趣的，我们应该提倡一种快乐语文的学习方式，这些乐趣总的体现在：
⒈阅读的乐趣
上课，完成作业，只是我们看到的学习的表面，学好语文，离不开阅读大量的文字，阅读应该与我们的生活密切联系，一本课外的好书可以提前几年提升你的知识境界，可以更新你的知识含量，21世纪一份报纸一周的信息量比18世纪人类一生掌握的信息量还多。你们不用抱着学会什么的任务心态去阅读，要利用课余非学习的时间，仅仅是捧起一本书，随意的翻开，不用怕读不懂，第一遍不懂，多读几遍肯定就会有自己的理解。抄下你感到有意义的句子，当你确实有了很深的感悟想要抒发的话，写一篇读后感是水到渠成的事。
有这么一个一个故事，俄国作家契诃夫写过一篇短篇小说叫做《打赌》，讲的是一次晚会上，银行家和一个年轻的律师打赌，律师将在一间小屋里囚禁，“规定在十五年间他无权跨出门槛，看见活人，听见人声，收到信件和报纸。允许他有一样乐器，可以读书、写信、喝酒和抽烟。跟外界的联系，根据契约，他只能通过一个为此特设的小窗口进行，而且不许说话。他需要的东西，如书，乐谱，酒等等，他可以写在纸条上，要多少给多少，但只能通过窗口。”按照约定，15年后，他将得到银行家的大半财产。15年过去了，年轻人除了每天要求外界给他送书，始终没有走出过屋子一步，到达规定日期的前一天，银行家反悔了，他决定在深夜潜入屋子，杀死那个年轻律师，守住自己的财富。一根将要燃尽的蜡烛旁边，他看到已经骨瘦如柴的年轻人正熟睡着，旁边放着一封刚刚写好的信：信中说，他感谢企业家，十五年来他读了许多书，这些知识将是他终身用不尽的财富，他还明白了许多道理。他决定不再要企业家的财产，他将于明天拂晓前破窗而出，自动毁约。一起来听一下信中的一段话：
十五年来，我潜心研究人间的生活。的确，我看不见天地和人们，但在你们的书里我喝着香醇的美酒，我唱歌，在树林里追逐鹿群和野猪，和女人谈情说爱……由你们天才的诗人凭借神来之笔创造出的无数美女，轻盈得犹如臼云，夜里常常来探访我，对我小声讲述着神奇的故事，听得我神迷心醉。在你们的书里，我攀登上艾尔布鲁士和勃朗峰的顶巅，从那里观看早晨的日出，观看如血的晚霞如何染红了天空、海洋和林立的山峰。我站在那里，看到在我的上空雷电如何劈开乌云，像人蛇般游弋;我看到绿色的森林、原野、河流、湖泊、城市，听到塞王的歌唱和牧笛的吹奏;我甚至触摸过美丽的魔鬼的翅膀，它们飞来居然跟我谈论上帝……在你们的书里我也坠入过无底的深渊，我创造奇迹，行凶杀人，烧毁城市，宣扬新的宗教，征服了无数王国……
你们的书给了我智慧。不倦的人类思想千百年来所创造的一切，如今浓缩成一团，藏在我的头颅里。我知道我比你们所有的人都聪明。
我也蔑视你们的书，蔑视人间的各种幸福和智慧。一切都微不足道，转瞬即逝，虚幻莫测，不足为信，有如海市蜃楼。虽然你们骄傲、聪明而美丽，然而死亡会把你们彻底消灭，就降消灭地窖里的耗子一样，而你们的子孙后代，你们的历史，你们的不朽天才，将随着地球一起或者冻结成冰，或者烧毁。为了用行动向你们表明我蔑视你们赖以生活的一切，我放弃那两百万，虽说我曾经对它像对天堂一样梦寐以求，可是现在我蔑视它。为了放弃这一权利，我决定在规定期限之前五个小时离开这里，从而违反契约……
银行家最后放弃了杀他的打算，律师则在第二天早晨偷偷地离开了屋子。他的感悟虽然有些极端，但我们可以看到，真正的阅读是充满无限吸引力的。
你们处在中考的学习压力下，课堂语文学习会以考试做题为中心，这很容易让你们沦为考试工具，失去思想和智慧的发展潜能，为了开阔视野，我们更需要培养阅读兴趣，把读书当做信仰一般，这样，不久的将来，你们既能升入好的高中，同时也会装满丰富的思想，让自己的人生充满更多乐趣。
⒉电影、音乐的乐趣
一本好电影比我们的课文有更深的心灵震荡，一首好的歌词会有诗一样的语言，让我们获得更美的文字体验。
三、确定语文学习的目标
阅读、欣赏电影和音乐，提升的是我们的文艺素养和气质，我希望这是你们一辈子都离不开的事。但是三年，我们有一个短期的目标，每一学期的期末考，三年后的中考，要检查你掌握的知识能力，决定你能不能升入杭二、学军、杭高这样的全国名校。所以我们的学习目标是这样的：掌握良好的阅读文章能力、文字运用及写作能力;会背诵一定篇目的古诗词、文章;掌握现代文、文言文的基础字词知识。我的要求是：把我当做你们的向导，跟着我，多思考，把每一次课当做一步楼梯，一步一步的走，认认真真地上好课，做好作业，背诵好文字，持之以恒，千万不要落下。
确定课代表、组长
作业：预习第一篇课文
我的语文学习目标
我最喜欢的一本书
我期待一个什么样的语文老师
学习语文的方法
1、注重日常积累：语文考验的是自己肚中的墨水，若是自己没有一定知识累积的话，语文成绩自然不高。所以想要提升语文成绩，平时更应该注重诗词好句的积累。
2、学会理解文章：通过理清文章的结构层次，明确课文的内在逻辑，把结构层级作为记忆线索，形成知识网络，更能方便记忆。
3、学会观察周围：写作是源于生活的，最打动人的往往是细节之处。所以平时要多观察生活，写作时多做细节描写，才能真正为作文进行润色，让老师能眼前一亮。
学习语文的技巧
1、学习未动，兴趣先行
2、务学与求道
3、自信是成功的第一秘诀
4、态度决定一切
5、不强调进步
6、练就过硬的本领是学习的根本目的
7、会玩、会偷懒、然后会学
8、考试、分析考试结果、做出下一步计划、调整自己
9、学习别人
七年级英语教案 篇3
Unit 1 How often do you exercise
Section A说课教案
1a ---1c
教材分析：本单元以“How often do you exercise ?”为话题展开教学活动。首先学会恰当地使用频率副词及短语，再学会描述课余时间的活动安排和基本饮食结构。通过复习七年级学习过的动词短语，及本单元的听力练习，各种方式的口语交际活动和写作练习，使学生积极参与，合作，从而培养学生的综合语言运用能力。教材在本单元的开篇，即本课时，安排了关于谈论课余时间的各项活动，以及初步认识和使用频率副词，为进一步地使用频率副词及动词短语做语言知识上的准备。
教学目标：
A：语言目标：恰当使用always usually often sometimes hardly ever never 等频率副词和日常活动短语：watch TV go shopping read books exercise等。
掌握句型： What do you usually do on weekends? I often go to the movies.
What does she do on weekends ？ She often goes to the movies.
B：能力目标：学习描述课余时间的活动安排，初步培养学生的语言综合运用能力。
C：德育目标：培养学生的逻辑表述能力，激发学生的积极思维，并使学生互相了解，增进友谊，加强人际交往，以形成良好的人际关系。
教学重点：核心句型： What do you usually do on weekends?
I often go to the movies.
教学难点：第三人称单数谓语动词在此核心句型中的运用。
教学用具：词汇卡片 多媒体课件一套
教学过程：
Step1 Warm-up activities
(1) Do it (学生按教师的指令做动作)
T：Read books. / Do homework!/ Draw pictures/ Look at the blackboard
T: run / stop / stand up / sit down.
(2) Do as I do.（学生跟老师边说边做动作）
I read books on weekends.
I run on weekends.
I do my homework on weekends.
Step 2 Revision and presentation
(1)教师问：“What do you usually do on weekends ? ” (并且板书)让学生根据自己的实际回答 I usually …… on weekends.
(2)教师出示动词卡片 watch TV、read books 、exercise 、clean、skateboard、 play basketball、wash clothes、go shopping、 go to movies让学生认读。
(3)做游戏：“ What’s missing?” (学生先把动词卡片全部读一遍，教师从卡片中任意抽掉一张，再让学生看卡片读动词短语，然后让学生说出抽掉的是哪一张词汇卡片。)
Step 3 Pattern drill and dialogue
（1）出示词汇卡片给学生，并提问：“What do you usually do on weekends?” 引导学生回答： I usually …… on weekends.
（2）Task one “Find my group members.”
在规定 时间内填完活动表格，再向周围同学开始询问，找出与自己课外活动大致相同的同学请他或她在每项活动后面签名。
Activity
Name
（3）Look at the picture on the book ,name each activity .Then ask students to point to each picture , ask and answer in pairs . “What ’s the boy/girl doing ? ” “He/She is reading .” Check the answers on the blackboard and ask students to correct their own activities.(1a )
Step 4 Presentation and drill
（1）教师指着屏幕说：“ Now let’s see my activities on weekends. 屏幕上出现各项活动的图片并介绍。 I always read books at 6:00 in the morning. Then I usually run at 6:30. I often clean my house in the afternoon. Sometimes I watch TV, but I never watch TV too much. I hardly ever go to the movies.
（2）点击鼠标屏幕上出现频率副词及相关的百分比。
always(100%) usually(80%) often (30-50%)
sometimes(20%) hardly ever(5%) never(0%)
领读频率副词，让学生快速认读。
（3）分别点击活动图片，每个图片正面出现一个频率副词。
教师依次提问： What do you do on weekends?
引导学生用图片中的活动及副词回答，如：I usually run.
（4）TaskTwo: Making cards
每个学生把自己的课外活动做成卡片，再把频率副词做成卡片，然后一个学生问What do you do on weekends? 另一个学生分别拿一张活动卡片和频率卡片并用其进行回答。
Step 5 Practice and drill
（1）Play the recording the first time .Students only listen . Play the recording a second time . Point to the pictures . This time say , Listen to the conversation and write the letter of one activity (a through e )after the word in the list .(1b)
(2) 屏幕上出现一张一个女孩读书的图片，教师提问：
What does she do on weekends?
再点击图片出现副词often 引导学生回答 She often reads books.
(3) 点击屏幕出现 A：What do you do on weekends?
B: I often read books.
C: What does she do ?
D: She often reads books/
(4) 点击图片出现活动图片，四人小组练习对话。
(5) Task three: Do a survey “What does she /he do on weekends ?”
Name
Activity
How often
Step 6 Homework
(1) Make a conversation “What do you usually do after school ?” in groups.
(2) Collect some information about your favorite teacher with your partners ,such as his or her personality , hobby , eating habit and so on . Then introduce this teacher to us .
教学板书设计：
Unit 1. How often do you exercise ? 1a-----1c
A:What do you usually do on weekends?
B:I often go to the movies.
教学策略：根据本课时的特点，我安排了六个环节：
第一个环节让学生按老师的指令做动作来调整学生的精神状态，同时又复习了一些动词，为新课做知识上的准备；
在第二个环节中，通过复习旧句型“What do you usually do on weekends ? ”，引出了七年级曾学过的频率副词usually和一些动词短语,减轻学生学习新课的难度；
第三环节,通过完成课本Activity 1a和Task 1来加强说和写的能力的培养；
第四环节出现了本课时的重点，因为句型已掌握熟练，这些重点内容——新频率副词的使用，也迎刃而解，再通过Task Two: Making cards这一有趣的活动来加深理解；
第五环节，是我在教学中的扩展和延伸，在完成课本Activity 1b和Task3的过程中，把学生们学习一般现在时态的难点，用对比的方式清楚地呈现给学生，使学生充分感知和理解，使学生在交际中对语言的认识得到升华。
在第六环节中，我安排了编对话活动来加强听说能力的培养，第二题是一个开放性的作业，在锻炼学生的综合语言运用能力的同时，又让他们学会合作与交流。在本课的整个教学过程中，教学重点内容（1c）贯穿始终，这是在教学实际中对教材的调整，由于本课教材没有涉及到一般现在时态的单三形式，而它又是中学生学习英语易疏忽的问题，所以我在本课做了补充。
七年级英语教案 篇4
【学习目标】：
1、熟练掌握本课13个单词.
2、谈论对方喜欢或不喜欢的食物。
【学习重点】：
名词的复数形式。
【学习过程】：
一、自主学习(教师寄语：knowledge is power.)
学习任务一: 会读写本课13个单词.
1.个人自读，记忆本课单词.
2.小组互相检查单词读写情况.
3.根据汉语写出下列英语单词并展示
喜欢___________香蕉_____________汉堡包___________西红柿_________
花椰菜_________薯条_____________橙子_____________冰____________
奶油__________ 冰淇淋_________ 沙拉___________ 草莓_________梨__________
学习任务二: 谈论对方喜欢或不喜欢的食物。
1. 录音完成1b ( 面的对话编号)
2. 两人一组练习1b 对话.
3. pair work 和你同伴模仿1b对话.编新对话.
二、合作共建(教师寄语：many hands make light work. )
小组讨论你所学的不可数名词.
_______________________________________________________
三、系统总结(教师寄语：no man can do two things at once.)
i. 一般情况下加 -s . 如： book books
hamburger _____________pear__________ banana_______________ orange_________ ii. 以 o 结尾的加 -s 或-es 如： photo photos
tomato _______________
iii. 以 s . sh ch . x 结尾的`加-es 如： watch watches
bus _________
iv . 以辅音字母加 y 结尾的变 y 为 i 加 es . 如： dictionary dictionaries
strawberry __________ family _______________
四、 诊断评价：
(一) 翻译下列句子.
1.我喜欢花椰菜。
____________________________________________________________
2.我不喜欢橘子。
__________________________________________________________
3.他喜欢西红柿.
__________________________________________________________
4.她不喜欢梨.
____________________________________________________________
5.你喜欢冰淇淋吗?不，我不喜欢
__________________________________________________________
6.你喜欢草莓吗?是的，我喜欢。
________________________________________________________
(二) 根据句意及汉意写出下列单词
(1) do you l ________ salad ?
(2) i want to eat some b _________.
七年级英语教案 篇5
对于七年级英语教师来说，英语教学工作的顺利开展需要有一套完整的教案来支撑，这样可以保证英语教学工作的顺利开展。但是对于多数教师来说，英语教案的设计与制作并不是一件容易的事情，需要花费心思去思考和设计，下面是沪江小编为大家提供的关于七年级英语教案的相关模板，希望能够帮助大家提升英语教案制作的效果。
Starter Unit 1
Good morning!
一、单元教材分析
本单元要求学生掌握英文字母A—H，能认读其印刷体和手写体字母的大小写等四种形式。书写(大写和小写，笔顺，笔画)基本合乎要求。学习一些简单的英文名字，注意区别性别，并为自己取一个英文名字。能看、听、说、唱本单元所列的日常交际用语，重点学会打招呼、相互问候并做到语音语调正确。注意一些字母及日常交际用语的发音，总结元音字母a和e的发音规则。
二、单元学情分析
本单元围绕“问候他人”这一话题，展开听、说、读、写的教学活动。为了创设较为真实的语言环境，首先让学生们认识一些较为简单的英文名字，并让学生们为自己取一个英文名字，让学生们感知、认识英语，并尽快进入英语的环境中。在教学过程中应让学生体会打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。刚开始学习英语，学生们肯定对学习英语的兴趣非常深厚，教师一定要利用好这一点，让学生在学习英语中能获得乐趣。并逐步让学生们形成稳定的学习兴趣。
三、单元教学建议
采用自主学习、小组合作学习、Role playing、 pair work等方式开展听、说、读、写的学习活动。教师要尽量利用幻灯片、挂图、实物等给学生创造较为真实的英语情景。在教学中创设切实可行的任务型教学活动、突出交际性。引趣激趣策略，创设情景调节气氛，引发激发学生兴趣。教师可以用手势，表情，动作等示意，帮助学生听懂课堂用语和日常交际用语，不讲或少讲汉语。
四、单元课时分配
本单元可用2课时完成教学任务：
(1a-2e) 用1课时
(3a-4d) 用1课时
(1a-2d)
五、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下词汇：字母Aa ~ Hh, good, morning, Good morning!, hi, hello
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① Good morning, Helen!
② Hello, Frank!
③ Hi, Bob!
3) 能理解用英语打招呼的不同说法，并能灵活运用。
4) 能掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
让学生们在相互问候的过程中，学会礼貌待人，与同学之间友好相处。万事开头难，首先利用这个单元培养学生们对英语的兴趣，因为兴趣是最好的老师。
六、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。
2) 学习用英语进行见面打招呼，并能体会不同的打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。
3) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2. 教学难点：
1) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。
七、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead in
Listen to a “Good morning!” song. Then Ss learn to sing this song.
(利用JEFC教材中的Good morning!歌曲导入新课.)
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Come into the classroom and greet the class with a smile and say Good morning! Now, introduce the words “teacher” and “class” by using gestures. Repeat this several times and have the class repeat after you. Students can answer as a whole group, as rows and as individuals.
T: (By gestures) "Teacher; Class"
Ss: (Repeat after teacher) "Teacher; Class"
2. Point to yourself and say I’m Miss/Mr. … Have them repeat. Explain the terms Miss and Mr. in Chinese. Ss repeat this a few times with rows and individuals.
Ss: Miss/ Ms. … (Ss repeat)
Ss: Morning, Miss/Ms. … (Ss repeat)
Ss: Good morning, Ms., Mr. … (Ss repeat)
3. Leave the classroom, return and say Good morning, class! Help the students respond with Good morning, Miss/Mr. … Say "Sit down, please. Now let’s start the lesson."
(Practice it several times.)
Ⅲ. Game (Choose an English name.)
1. T: We have many new friends in our class this year. They are from the U.S.A. and England. Who are they? Do you want to know them? Now please look at the screen.
(过大屏幕展示第一页上的彩图，然后再展示单张图片，并分别与名字相对应。)
(Show the picture of Bob.)
T: This is Bob. (Teach Ss "Bob")
Ss: Bob (Ss read after the teacher.)
(Then teach the name: Dale, Frank and Eric in the same way. Tell Ss they're boys.)
(Show the picture of Grace.)
T: This is Grace. (Teach Ss "Grace")
Ss: Grace (Ss read after the teacher.)
(Then teach the name: Helen, Cindy and Alice in the same way. Tell Ss they're girls.)
2. Ss read the names aloud. Then let some Ss read the names to the class.
3. T: Now let's work on 1a. Look at the picture in 1a and write down the names in the picture. Attention: Which are boys' names and which are girls' names?
4. Choose a name for yourself in a group. Then practice saying: "I'm …” (用汉语说明I'm… 意为“我叫……名字。”)
S1: I'm Alice.
S2: I'm Bob.
…
Ⅳ. Listening
1. Tell Ss that our new friends are greeting each other. Please keep quite and listen the recording.
(教师播放录音三次，第一次学生们仅听，第二次和第三次学生们跟读。注意可运用暂停键来让学生们有足够的时间读完。)
2. Ss listen and repeat after the recording.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1.(让学生们看1a图画中的人物的对话，告诉学生图画中有三组对话，分别是Bob与Helen的对话;Dale与Eric及Frank的对话;Cindy与Alice的对话。)
T: You are Bob, your partner is Helen. You are Dale, your partner is Eric. Then you are Cindy, your partner is Alice. Practice the conversations.
Ss practice the conversations in pairs.
T: Exchange the roles. And practice the conversations again.
Ss exchange the roles and practice the conversations again.
2. 运用刚学的句型，并用刚才自己所选择的英文名字来相互问候。
S1: Good morning, Cindy!
S2: Hello, Frank!
S3: Good morning, Grace!
S4: Hi, Bob!
Ⅵ. Listening
1. (告诉学生们英语中有26个英语字母，它们就像我们汉语的笔画一样是构成单词的要素。下面我们先来学习字母Aa ~ Hh。其中A、B、C、D、E、F、G、H是大写字母;a、b、c、d、e、f、g、h是小写字母。)
2. 教师播放录音三次，第一次学生们仅听，第二次和第三次学生们跟读。注意可运用暂停键来让学生们有足够的时间读完。
3. Let some Ss read out the letters Aa ~ Hh. (注意纠正学生们不准确的读音)
4. Let Ss try to remember the letters Aa ~ Hh.
5. Now let's work on 2b. Listen and number the letters you hear [1-8].
(教师播放录音三次，第一次学生们仅听，第二次听录音填编号、第三次听录音校对答案。)
Ⅶ. Writing
1. T: Now let's learn how to write these letters. First look at the picture carefully in 2c. Then tell us how to write these English letters.
2. Ss read and find out the writing rules of the letters Aa ~ Hh.
S1：大字字母都是占上两格。
S2：字母a、c、e占中间的一格。
S3：字母b、d、h占上两格。
S4：字母g占下两格。
S5：字母f占三格。
3. Ss try to copy the letters by themselves. T goes around the classroom to give any help.
4. Let some Ss come to the Bb, and write down the letters on the Bb. Check with the whole class.
Ⅷ. Practice
1. Tell Ss to look at the picture in 2d. First, read the letters aloud. Then let some Ss read the letters to the class aloud.
2. Let Ss try to write down the missing letters. Check the answers with your partner.
3. Let some Ss come the Bb and write missing letters on the Bb.
(注意看学生们的字母笔顺是否正确，纠正不正确的笔顺，并让其他学生引起注意。)
Ⅸ. Read and Talk
1. Let Ss look at the pictures in 2e. Let some Ss read the letters below each picture.
2. Let some Ss talk about the meaning of each picture.
S1: HB (铅笔芯)硬黑
S2: CD 光盘;激光唱片
Ⅹ. Game
Let the students do some letters games to enjoy your lesson，the following is the instruction.
七年级英语教案 篇6
试题预览
元旦竞赛试题
七年级 英语
注意事项：
1．本试卷分第Ⅰ卷（选择题）和第Ⅱ卷（非选择题）两部分，共8页。满分100分，考试时间90分钟。答卷前，考生务必用0.5毫米黑色签字笔将自己的姓名、准考证号、座号填写在试卷和答题卡规定的位置。考试结束后，将本试卷和答题卡一并交回。
2．答题注意事项见答题卡，答在本试卷上不得分。
第I卷（选择题 共50分）
一、单项填空（共20小题，计20分）
选择最佳答案。
1. Li Lei has orange. Its color is ________ orange.
A. the; an B. an; / C. /; an D. the; /
2. ______name is Tom. Please call ________Tom.
A. He; my B. I; me C. My; me D. She; I
3. Let’s ________ TV together after school.
A. to watch B. watch C. watches D. watching
4. These are my two brothers. That’s my __________.
A. sister B. sistersC. parents D. grandfathers
5. -When is your birthday ?
-_________.
A. TenB. Two dollars C. Ten thirty D. June 1st
6. -_________ are the pants?
- They are 180 yuan.
A. How many B. When C. Where D. How much
7. Thank you the letters and photos.
A. in B. at C. to D. for
8. - How do you spell your name, please?
-__________
A. P-E-T-E-R, Peter.B. This is Peter.
C. I’m Peter. D. You can call me Peter.
9. -______ is your schoolbag?
- It’s green.
A. Where B. What color C. What D. How
10. 按照字母表先后顺序排列这5个单词: Kate, Bill, John, Sally, Bob.正确顺序是:______
A. Kate Bill John Sally Bob
B. Kate John Bill Bob Sally
C. Bill Bob John Kate Sally
D. Bill Kate Sally Bob John
11. His name is Jim Smith. Jim is hisname.
A. family B. firstC. last D. second
12. I like playing basketball.
A. a B. / C. the D. in
13. - Is this your book?
-. It’s hers.
A. Yes, it’s.B. No, it is.
C. No, it isn’t. D. Yes, it isn’t.
14. I love hamburgers, I can’t eat them much.
A. and B. or C. or D. but
15. May is month of the year.
A. fourth B. five C. the fifth D. the five
16. Call Alice ______ 767671.
A. in B. for C. to D. at
17. -Welcome to our school!
-__________.
A. Thank you. B. You, too.
C. I like it very much. D. You are good.
18. I have a Chinese book and an English book. The Chinese book is on the English book.
Where’s my English book?
A. It’s on the Chinese book. B. It’s in the Chinese book.
C. It’s under the Chinese book.D. It’s behind the Chinese book.
19. Tom: “Let’s play soccer ball.” Jim: “That sounds boring.”
Does Jim like playing soccer ball?
A. Yes, he does. B. No, he doesn’t.
C. Yes, he doesn’t. D. No, he does.
20. Mary has math on Monday. She thinks it’s easy and interesting. She says her math teacher is very good.Does Mary like math?
A. Yes, she does. B. No, she doesn’t.
C. Yes, she doesn’t. D. No, she does.
二、阅读理解（共15小题，计30分）
A
My name is Bill. I get up at six forty in the morning. Then I have breakfast. After breakfast I go to school. We have four classes in the morning. I have lunch at school, but on Sundays I have lunch at home with my family. I often have supper at home. I often help my mother cook. My mother is an English teacher, and she often helps me with my English.
根据短文内容，判断下列句子正误。正确的用“A”表示，不正确的用“B”表示。
21. Tom is a student.
22. He doesn’t have lunch at home on Sundays.
23. He often helps his mother cook.
24. He gets up at six in the morning.
25. His mother helps him study English.
B
Here are two pictures.
A man and a boy are in one picture. Who are they? Let me tell you. The man is Mr. White, and the boy’s name is Bill. He’s the man’s son. Now they’re in Bill’s bedroom. We can see some Chinese books on the desk. And on the bed is a shirt. It’s Bill’s. His pants are on it, under his shirt, too.
Now let’s look at the other picture. You can see a woman and a girl in it. The woman is Bill’s mother and she’s in her daughter, Ann’s room. You can see a photo of the Whites on the white wall. Between the windows is a desk. A clock is on the desk. It’s eleven. What’s that on the floor? Oh, it’s Ann’s hat, but it looks like a black cat.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
26. In the two pictures, we can see ____________.
A. three peopleB. five people C. four people D. two people
27. Mr. White is ____________.
A. Ann’s fatherB. Ann’s brother C. Bill’s teacherD. Bill’s mother
28. Bill’s pants are ____________.
A. on the bed B. on the desk C. on the floorD. in the desk
29. What color is Ann’s hat?
A. White. B. Red. C. Black. D. Green
30. In Ann’s bedroom, we can see a ___________on the floor.
A. ball &nb
七年级英语教案 篇7
Section A (1a-2d)
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词：rules, arrive, late, hall, dinning hall, listen, listen to, fight, sorry
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① Don't eat in class.
② You must be on time.
③ Eat in the dining hall.
2. 学会用英语表达一些标志的含义。
3. 熟练使用目标语言谈论对某些规章制度(校规、家规等)的看法
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 肯定祈使句是省略掉主语的原形动词开头;
2) 否定祈使句则是在肯定祈使句前加上“don’t”。
3) 情态动词must及have to在用法上的区别。
2. 教学难点：
掌握祈使句的用法，并能听懂、会说一些简单的祈使句。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming-up and revision
用祈使句请学生们完成一系列动作：
Please stand up/ sit down. Close the door, please. Look at me and listen to me.
Don’t open your books. Don’t talk. Let’s begin our class.
Ⅱ. 1a
T: Now, Look at the picture on your textbook. Each of the students is breaking one of these rules. Please finish 1a.
Ⅳ. Listening
Now let’s listen! What rules are these students breaking? Write the numbers after names?
Ⅴ. Pair work
Read the dialogue in 1cand work in pairs.
Ⅵ. Listening
1. First, let's read the sentences in 2a together. Now, let's listen to the recording. Check the activities Alan and Cindy talk about.
2. Work on 2b: Listen to the recording again. Can Alan and Cindy do these activities? Circle can or can't above.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Suppose you are Alan and your partner is Cindy. Talk about the rules in 2a.
2. Let some students come to the front and act out the conversations.
Ⅷ. Role-play
Read the conversation and find some rules in this school. Ss read the conversations and find the answers to this question.
( Don't be late for school. Don't bring music players to school. You always have to wear the school uniform. You have to be quiet in the library. )
Homework:
1. Remember the new words and expressions.
2. 完成下列句型转换试题
1)I can play computer games on weekends.(一般疑问句)
_________________________________? Yes, ____________.
2) He has to wear uniform.(变否定句) He _____ _____ _____ wear uniform.
3) I have to wear sneakers for gym class.(一般疑问句)
_____ you ____ ____ wear sneakers for gym class? Yes, I ____.
4) They have to wash clothes.(提问) ____ do they have ____ ____?
5) You can’t go out on school nights.(换一种表达) _______ go out on school nights.
6) Don’t talk in class.(同上) No _________.
Section A (Grammar Focus-3c)
教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 继续学习使用目标语言谈论对某些规章制度(校规、家规等)的看法
2) 通过不同方式的练习方式来学会用英语表达一些标志的含义。
3) 运用祈使句来表达一些规章和制度。
2. 教学难点：
1) 总结用祈使句、情态动词can、must及have to来表达各种规章制度;
2) 能用所学的知识来制定一些简单的规章制度。
教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。
① 不要在楼道里跑。_______________________
② 不要打架。 ____________________
③ 有什么规则? ___________________
④ 我们必须按时上课。 ____________________
⑤ 我们可以在教室里吃东西吗?____________________
⑥ 不能。但我们可以在餐厅里吃东西。___________________
⑦ 我们可以在教室里带帽子吗?____________________
2. Ss finish off the sentences and check the answers by themselves.
Ⅲ. Writing
Look at 3a. Do you know the meaning of these pictures? Can you write the rules for the school library?
Ss discuss the pictures and make some rules. Let some Ss read their rules aloud. Check the answers with the class.
(Don't listen to music in the library. Don't eat or drink in the library. Don't take photos in the library. )
Ⅳ. Practice
Work on 3b: Use the words to make questions about the rules. Then write answers according to your school. For example: Be quiet? (she/have to/ in the library) Does she have to be quiet in the library? Yes, she does.
2. 注意： have to虽是情态动词，但其在句子中与谓语动词共同构成句子时，其一般疑问句应用助动词do或does来帮助构成;而情态动词can则直接提前构成一般疑问句式。
3. Ss work by themselves and try to write the sentences on the workbook.
4. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer the sentences.
Ⅴ. Game
Ss work in groups and discuss what rules are in their school. Write down their rules on the work. Let some Ss read their rules aloud. See whose school is the coolest?
Ⅵ. Exercises
1. If time is enough, do some more exercises on the screen.
Homework
1. Read the sentences in Grammar Focus.
2. Make some rules at home.
板书设计
Section B 1a-2c
教学重难点
1. 能掌握以下单词：out, go out, dish, do the dishes, night, before, dirty, kitchen, more, noisy, relax, read, terrible, feel, strict, be strict with, remember, follow, follow the rules, luck
2. 能掌握以下句型：
① Don't leave the dirty dishes in the kitchen.
② I can't relax either.
③ I must read a book before I can watch TV.
④ I have to help mom make breakfast.
3. 理解must, have to/ can/can't的用法
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
Check the homework. Let some Ss read their home rules.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Show some pictures on the big screen and let Ss learn the new words and expressions.
2. 学生看着1a部分的图片
学生朗读1部分的“rules”，并将图片a~h的序号填写在1b这些规则前的方框中。
Check the answers with the class.
Ⅲ. Listening
1. Tell Ss they'll listen to the recording about Dave's house rules. Listen and put an× for things Dave can't do and a √for things he has to do.
2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check.
Ⅳ. Listening
Now let's work on 1c. Now first, let's read the phrases aloud together. Explain the meaning of the phrases if necessary.
Play the recording three times for the Ss to listen and write the phrases in the chart in 1b.
Check the answers:
Ⅴ. Group work
Divide the Ss into groups to talk about Dave's home rules. Make a list of Dave's house rules. Ⅵ. Reading
1. Fast reading: Read the letter and find the answer to this question:
What does Molly feel about the rules?
Ss read the letter and find the answer to this question. (she feels terrible.)
2. Careful reading: Read the letter again and underline the rules for Molly. Check the answers with the class. (Let some Ss read their answers aloud. Let other Ss add some rules. )
3. Careful reading
1) Read Dr. Know's letter and answer this question: What does she think of the school and home rules? Let one student read out his/her answer.
(She thinks parents and schools are sometimes strict, but they make rules to help us. We have to follow them. )
Ⅶ. Reading
1. Read the letter again and complete the sentences with have to/ must, can or can't.
2. 提示： have to与must的用法：
1)must表示一种主观的需要，而have to表示一种客观的需要，意思是“不得不”。如： I have to attend an important meeting this afternoon.
今天下午我不得不参加一个重要的会议。
Mother is out, so I have to look after the shop.
妈妈不在家，因此我不得不照看商店。
2)have to的否定形式是don’t have to, 相当于needn’t。如：
They don’t have to buy a computer at present.
他们目前没有必要买电脑。
Homework
1. Remember the new words and expressions in this period.
2. Ask Ss write down Molly's rules at home and at school.
七年级英语教案 篇8
No. 110 Middle School of Chongqing By Cao Yi
Teaching Goal:
1. General aims:
Talk about jobs.
2. Particular aims:
A. Language Focus.
Talk about jobs and the place where people work.
B. Language goals
(1). What do you do? I’m a reporter.
(2). What does she want to be? She wants to be a sales assistant.
C. Language structures:
(1). What do you do? I am a teacher.
(2). What does he want to do? He wants to be an officer.
(3). Does your father work? Yes, he does.
(4). What does your mother do?
D. Useful words and phrases:
Words: assistant, sales assistant, doctor, reporter, police officer, waiter, bank clerk, star, thief, nurse, money, station, magazine, dinner, dangerous, afraid, late
Phrases: get … from, work for, work hard, call at, school play, evening newspaper, be afraid of
E. Grammar language:
Special questions
F. Learning strategies:
Learn other’s job
G. Interdiscipinary:
Social and communication.
H. Emotion and manner:
Teaching time: 6 periods
Teaching procedures:
Period One (pp19-20)
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary: sales assistant. Doctor. Actor. Reporter. Police. Officer. Waiter. Bank clerk. student
2. Master and use: What do you do? What does he do? Does he work in hospital?
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary
2. language: What does she do? She is a doctor.
难点Use the language to ask for the jobs
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体运用
Step 1
Organization 1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step2
Ree talk 2’ Talk about the weather and weeks. The student talk about something.
Step 3
Presentation
15’ 1. Ask students to look at the picture and remember what they can see
2. Find four groups to say the words that they remember. (教师板书，学生说出)
3. Talk about the picture then make a dialogue.
Such as: What is this? It’s a store. What can you see? I can see a sweater. What color is t? It’s green. How much is it? It’s 50 dollars
4. Ask students: What is your father? He is a worker. (Tell them another way of saying:
What does your father do?板书）出示一张人物以及职业的图片，问学生：
Is he a worker? No, he isn’t. What is he? He is a doctor. 或问：What does he do?
然后以同桌之间一问一答的形式来练习：
Such as: A: What does he do?
B: He is a reporter.
5. Listen to the tape: 1b. 2a. ab.
Listen and number the people (1-3) in the picture above. Listen carefully three times. Point out the picture in activity 2a. Ask who each person is, say, Now work with your partner. Ask and answer questions about the pictures.
Ask ss to close their books and write down the words about the things.
Ask ss to act out in pairs or groups.
Call more students to practice more.
Ask ss about jobs in pairs or groups.
多媒体放映
图一
图二
录音机
Step 4
Practice 6’ Now, practice the things we have learned.
They can talk about the jobs. Such as: What do you do?
I am a student.
What does your father do?
He is a farmer. 给学生们一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都能有机会来表演。
多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class.
Language: What does he do? What does he want to be? He is a worker. He wants to be a sales assistant. 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 text 4’ 1、Self check 让学生作后再讲解答案。 多媒体放映
Step 7 Consolidation 4’ In this class, we have learned the sentence:
What do you do? What does he do?
What does he want to be?
Talk about the jobs. Pay attention to the usage of “want” or “wants” 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework(1’) Practice The dialogue according to the picture on Page 1. 让学生写出五个询问对方职业的句子。
Period Two (p21)
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体运用
Step 1
Organization Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Talk about the family and the jobs, Such as; My father is a worker, And He works in a hospital The student talk freely
Step 3
Presentation 3’
1. Ask students to make some sentences with these words; waiter. Bank clerk. Reporter. Nurse. Police officer.
2. Look at the picture and match the jobs with the people in the pictures. Such as; I see a lot of money every day. But it’s not mine. I count it for other people match the bank clerk.
3. Let the students practice more and more.
4. They make a conversation to proc-tise the drills.
For example: What do you do?
I help doctors and patients. Some people call us “angels in white”, Can you guess what I do?
5. Pairwork: Practise the conversation on the right. Use the jobs and places in activity 3a.
Where does your sister work? She works at a hospital.
What does your sister work? She works at a hospital.
What does she do? She’s a doctor.
6. Game: Guess the game!
Draw a picture of someone at work.
Can your classmates guess the job?
Just like: Is he a police officer?
No, he isn’t? Is he a waiter?
Yes, he is 1. 叫学生口头造句，用一些有关职业的句子。争取大部分的同学都有回答的机会，多次重复加大练习。
2. 教师边让学生读句子边解释这些句子的意思。
3. 教师边让学生读句子，做到熟练掌握。
4. 采用游戏的形式，让尽可能多同学参与。
5．继续练习这个句式。能让学生自己造句。
多媒体放映
图一
图二
出示单词卡片
录音机
Step 4
Practice(6’) Now, practice the things we have learned.
They can talk about the jobs. Such as: What do you do?
Where does he work?
He is a doctor. He works in a hospital.
Is he a police officer? Yes, he is.
No, he isn’t 给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都能有机会来表演 多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class
Language: What does he do? What does he want to be? He is a worker.
He wants to be a sales assistant.
Where does he work?
He words in a hospital.
Is she a nurse? Yes, she is. 以提问的形式来进行总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会
Step 6
Test 4’ 1、Self check(见后面) 让学生作后在讲解答案 多媒体放映
Step 7
Consolidation 4’ In this class, we have learned the sentence:
Where does he work? He works in a factory.
A bank clerk: I see a lot of money every day. But it’s not mine. I count it for other people.
Talk about the jobs. Pay attention to the usage of “want” or “wants” 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework Pratice the dialogue according to the picture on Page 25. 让学生写出五个句子，分别询问职业和工作地点
Period Three (pp22-23)
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Oranization1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Oral practice: Games, words that describe jobs, such as exciting, dangerous, boring The students talk about freely
Step 3
Presentation 8’ 1. Let students look at the picture and guess the jobs. The teacher describes the jobs and let students guess what. Ask job does the person have? Where does the person work?
2. Then use explanations and short sample sentences to help students understand what each word means. For example, Exciting means very interesting and very fast-moving.
A police officer has an exciting job.
3. Let students practice. Such as: He is a police officer. It’s an exciting job.
4. Listen to the conversation. What jobs do Betty, Jenny, and Sam want? Then write the jobs below.
5. Listen again. Why are Betty, Jenny, and Sam interested in these jobs? Complete the chart above.
6. Listen to the tape: Listen and number the picture(1-3) below.
Then practise the dialogue.
7. Grammar focus: 1．叫学生口头造句用一些有关职业的句子。争取大部分的同学都有回答的机会，多次重复加大练习。
2. 教师边让学生读句子边解释这些句子的意思。
3. 叫学生口头练习一些有关这方面的句子。
4. 听录音，让学生填写表格，然后再纠正答案。
5. 分组练习，让学生大面积的练习。
6. 让学生朗读Gammar Focus 多媒体放映
图一
图二
出示单词卡片
录音机
Step 4
Practice 6’ 7. Read the newspaper want ads. And fill in the blanks with the correct jobs.
One: Wanted: Do you like to work late? Do you like to work hard? Do you like to meet people? If your answer is “Yes”, then we have a job for you as a …… 给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都有机会来表演。
多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class Language:
本节课主要是听录音来完成各种对话，充分让学生学会职业的文法以及地点的表达法。 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 test 4’ 1、Self check(见后面) 让学生做后再讲解答案 多媒体放映
Step 7 Consolidation 4’ 在这节课例我们主要听录音然后回答问题，让学生充分练习听力，达到会听、会说然后在自己编对话来练习。 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework Read the newspaper more and more. 让学生朗读3A部分的内容。
Period Four (P24)
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization 1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Oral composition: My parents.
Such as: I have a very happy family.
My father is a worker. He works in a factory. My mother is a nurse. She works in a hospital. 学生口头作文，让他们把学到的知识系统地用到自己的作文中来。练习关于职业以及工作地点的表达。
Step 3
Presentation
1. Let the students hurry to read the words they can’t remember.
2. Then the teacher guid the students to go over the words. See how the students have grasped.
3. Ask students to write five new words in their Vocab-builder.
4. Practise: I magine you want one of the jobs at BFS. Write and explain why your are good person for the job.
They don’t have to use real information about themselves-they can imagine that they have the skills needed to do one of the jobs. Remind them that they have to show why they are good for the job.
5. Go over the whole unit, first the words and useful expressions.
Then go over the frills: What do you do? What does he do?
Where does he work? He works in a factory. 1. 学生自测，看看他们急得如何。
2. 在让学生写五个生词填在单词表上。
3. 找工作：以小组为单位讨论。个人介绍推销自己。
4．总复习时，领着学生复习全部单词，争取让每一个学生都能来掌握。 多媒体放映
图一
图二
出示单词卡片
录音机
Step 4
Practice 6’ Now, practice the things we have learned.
They can talk about the jobs. Such as: What do you do?
Where does he work?
He is a doctor. He works in a hospital.
Is he a police officer? Yes, he is.
No, he isn’t
给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都有机会来表演。 多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Game: How to find a good job? Discuss and make a dialogue. 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 test 4’ 1. Self check(见后面)
In this class, we have learned self- 多媒体放映
Step 7
Consolidation
(4’) Check, then go over the whole unit. I think most of the students have grasped them very well. 让学生写一篇作文。 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework 1’ Especially the jobs and the places.
Compostion: How to find a good job?
Period Five
Testing (Weekly paper and Nan’an paper)
Note:
七年级英语教案 篇9
①导入
同学们，当你进入中学，跨入人生道路一个新的起点时，你一定对未来充满了新的憧憬和向往。追求美好的人生，是我们每个人在成长道路中共同的目标。《在山的那边》这一课的作者王家新以自己的情感体验给我们非常有益的启示。《在山的那边》是诗人王家新在二十多年前写的一首诗。在诗里，他述说了童年时代美好而朦胧的“梦”——对大海的热烈向往，长大后依然不停地追寻它。二十多年后的今天，诗人虽然已无数次见过童年时所向往的海，但是心目中的那个“海”依然遥不可及。那么，他心目中的“海”是什么呢?让我们来品读一下这首诗歌，从诗中找出答案。
②出示学习目标并板书课题
③教师检查预习(学生交流、巩固)
(过渡)《在山的那边》是一首诗，诗歌是一种特殊的艺术。在诗中，诗人要用形象而精练的语言来表达他反复体会的情感。我们要理解诗人的情感，就要有感情地朗读，体悟“海”与“山’’的象征意义，领会它们所蕴含的意味。学生先自由朗读，再听老师朗读，并且边听边思考问题。
④屏幕投影思考题
a、诗中的“山”和“海’’除字面意思外，还蕴含着什么意思?
b、全诗表达了作者怎样的感情?
教师配乐朗读，学生带着问题听读，然后讨论回答、相互评论、补充(可由教师鼓励学生探究回答，答案不必求统一，让学生在听读讨论后对诗歌有初步的了解)。
在此基础上，可让全班学生再次朗读诗歌，加深印象，也为进一步赏析诗歌作准备。
精读品味
(过渡)对诗歌有了大概的了解，还要品读诗歌形象而精练的语句，好的诗句总有画龙点睛之处，品读这些诗句，就能更好地领悟诗歌所蕴含的意味，获得思想启迪。
①自主、合作探究
可用屏幕投影思考题，学生思考：
a.自由朗读诗歌第二节，思考作者是怎样看到全新的世界，实现人生理想的?
b.找出你认为最形象、精练的语句，反复品读，体会诗人的思想感情。
学生自由朗读后，可四人小组讨论，共同探究以上问题。
[教师小结]学生从不同的角度，抓住不同的语句谈感受，体会到诗人用群山和大海的形象表达了人生的信念;并以自己的人生感悟启示我们，奔向理想的人生征途是漫长的，只要战胜困难，坚持奋斗，理想终将实现。
七年级英语教案 篇10
一、导入 介绍作者、亮标
繁星是常见的，引起过古今中外无数人的遐想，你一定也观察过天上的繁星，你是怎样观察的?有什么感受?(学生回答)好，下面我们来看看著名作家巴金是怎样观察繁星的，有哪些感受。(板书课题)指名学生介绍巴金和写作背景(口述)教师亮标。
二、朗读课文，初步感知
1.指名学生有感情地朗读课文，其余同学：
①用波浪线勾画出写巴金观察繁星的感受的词句
②思考课文是按照什么顺序来写的?用横线化出相关的词句
③理清文章结构
2.学生分小组讨论课文
参考答案：
①望着星天，我就会忘记一切，仿佛回到了母亲的怀里似的。好象它们就是我的朋友，它们常常在和我说话一样。我仿佛看见它们在对我霎眼，我仿佛听见它们在小声说话。在星的怀抱中，我微笑着，我沉睡着。我觉得自己是一个小孩子，现在睡在母亲的怀里了。那四颗明亮的星星是头，下面几颗......看，那个三人还在跑呢!
②按时间顺序。标志有从前、三年前、如今、有一夜
③第一部分(第一段)：描写我最爱看繁星，回忆从前在家乡夜晚望星天的情景和感受。
第二部分(第二段)：描写我三年前在南京读书时看望繁星的情景和感受。
第三部分(第三~第四段)：描写我在海上观看繁星的情景和感受。(如学生将第3，4段内容分开为在海上的每一天观看的情景与感受，有一夜看到的情景与感受，也应加以肯定、认可)
三、合作探究
1.研究比较三次看繁星的情景与感受有什么不同。讨论为什么不同。
参考答案：这个不相同是因为随着作者年龄和阅历的增长，对星空的观察和感知逐步深入精微了。
2.作者把星天比作母亲，把星星比作朋友，并和它们说话，运用了哪些修辞手法?表达了一种什么样的感情?
把繁星比作朋友，是为了突出作者看繁星时亲密投机的伙伴之感，觉得它们正友好地对我霎眼，同我小声地说话，突出了舒心、安详、陶醉之感，表达了作者对星空、繁星(即大自然)的热爱之情，美好生活的向往，童心、童趣不减。
3.阅读第5段，思考并回答问题：
①那个天上的巨人指什么?
--指英国人指给我看的天上那个像巨人般的星座。
②怎样理解?
--一是那个星座有着像巨人在跑似的形状，二是因为船在动，星也在动。(此题如学生提出其他理由，只要合理亦可)
4.体会看，那个巨人还在奔跑呢?中看和呢的表达效果。
参考答案：一个看字，呼唤读者，感情上与读者直接交流，更能引人注意，一个呢字，表示动作正在继续，显得更加生动。
四、作业
1.熟读课文，背诵第3段;
2.查找搜集有关星星最新信息的资料，结合文学分小组出一份手抄报。
附：
七年级英语教案 篇11
教学内容：狼
教学目标
知识与技能
⑴.揣摩语言，领悟作者语言运用的精妙，把握狼与屠户的形象。
⑵.理清文章生动曲折的故事情节。
⑶ .掌握课文中狼的阴险狡诈和屠户的机智勇敢的斗争精神及课文阐明的 道理。
过程与方法： 1.朗读 2．品读 3．讨论点拔
情感态度价值观
⑴.认识狼贪婪、凶狠和狡猾的本性，懂得对于狼一样的害人虫必须识破它的假象，坚决斗争，去争取胜利。
⑵.同社会中假、丑、恶等阴暗面作斗争。 教学重点
理清文章生动曲折的故事情节。
教学难点
掌握课文中狼的阴险狡诈和屠户的机智勇敢的斗争精神及课文阐明的道理
教学方法
朗读 分析
课时设计 三课时
第一课时
一.新课导入
介绍作家作品。 学生例举与“狼”有关的成语。同学们说出心目中狼的形象。学生介绍蒲松龄及《聊斋志异》
二:诵读课文
1. 学生.在下面自读.
2.个别学生读老师与学生共同校正字音 。
3.老师范读，定准字音及断句。
4.学生重新自读。
二．课堂总结。
三．课堂小测：
重要句子的断句及读音。
作业 ：结合课下注释试着翻 译课文。
第二课时
一、课前提问：简介作者。
二．教学新课
1.结合注释及手中的工具书翻译课文第一段。
归： 止： 缀行： 甚：
2. 结合注释及手中的工具书翻译课文第二段。
惧： 投以骨：
3. 结合注释及手中的工具书翻译课文第三段。
大窘： 顾： 弛： 持：
4. 结合注释及手中的工具书翻译课文第四段。
犬坐： 以刀： 悟： 盖：
5. 结合注释及手中的工具书翻译课文第五段。
几何： 止：
三：学生整理课文译文。
四：课堂小测：
重要句子的 翻译。
五：作业：背诵课下注释及课文。
第三课时
一．课前提问：重要句子的翻译。
二．新课;
（一）.理清故事情节：
（1）开端：遇狼。（2）发展：俱狼、御狼。（3）高潮和
结局：杀狼。
（二）、说评析文，把握形象：
（1）解读作者笔下的“狼”。
1...狼是本文的主角，你觉得文中哪个字最能反映狼的本性？
2..你能从课文哪些文句中看出狼具有“黠”这一本性？ A.久之，目似瞑，意暇甚。B.一狼洞其中，意将隧入以攻其后也。（应引导学生抓住“似”“甚”“洞”“攻”这些词，充分认识狼的狡猾本性。）
3..狼除了“黠”这一本性，还有哪些特点？请从课文中找出相应的依据。a.缀行甚远、仍从──→贪b.前狼止 而后狼又至 ──→贪c.两狼之并驱如故──→贪d.眈眈相向──→凶 1.多媒体小结狼之本性：黠、贪、凶
（二）解读作者笔下的屠夫。
1.面对既贪又凶又黠的两狼，屠夫有过怎样的心理？你觉得可用文中的 哪几个字来形容表达？ 开始的害怕，继而困窘，最后决心一搏。 惧─→窘─→持
2.换位思考。请同学们将自己假想为此境中的屠夫，用“与其……不如……”的句式，说说屠夫最后选择一搏曾有的心理活动。 3.屠夫是如何与两狼展开搏斗的呢？从中可看出屠夫具有怎样的品质？。
(三)、论说结局，感悟主旨
贪婪而又狡猾的狼最终却 落得“顷刻两毙”的命运。对这样的结局我想同学们一定会有什么话要对屠夫说。
（四）课文延伸;向学生介绍蒲松林的另外两则《狼》
（五）课堂小测 ：狼和屠户的形象。
三．作业：完成练习册习题。
板书设计：
狼
蒲松龄
屠户 ：
狼：
教学回顾
谭义专
[狼 教学设计(人教版七年级下册)]
七年级英语教案 篇12
教学目标：
1、掌握表示地点的'词汇;
2、掌握where引导的特殊疑问句;
3、能够简单地描述地点方位;
4、能够画出简单的示意图。
教学向导：
语言目标学习策略与思维技巧 重点词汇
表示地点的词汇
where引导的特殊疑问句个体、群体思维;
看图作答;
交换信息;Postoffice;library;hotel…
Between;on;nextto;acrossfrom…
语言结构 语言功能 跨学科学习
Therebe句型
Where句型的问答 询问路线
指出方位通过绘画激发学生学习兴趣
教学时间：4课时。
教学过程：
PeriodOne
Languagefunctions:
Isthereabanknearhere?
Yes,thereis.It’sonCenterStreet.
Whereisthesupermarket?
It’snexttothelibrary.
It’sbetweentherestaurantandthesupermarket.
Vocabulary:postoffice,park,bank,supermarket,payphone,street,mail,acrossfrom,between,infrontof,behind,there,avenue,bridge
Importantpoint:
Isthereasupermarket?
Yes,thereis./No,thereisnot
Difficultpoint:
Isthereasupermarket?Yes,thereis./No,thereisnot
教案正文随堂记录
whereis……?Itisinfrontof……
Learntoaskforandgivedirectionsinconversations.
Abilitytarget:
Trainstudents’listening,speaking,readingand
Emotiontarget:
Allthebuildingsmakeourcitybeautiful.
Thankthedesignersandtheworkers.
Thanksfortheirhardwork.
Teachingprocedure:
Step1Revision
Reviewtheprepositionthatthestudentshavelearned
ShowapictureofLily’sroom
T:Ihavealittlefriend,hernameisLily.Sheisanicegirl,butshealwaysforgetsthings.Shecan’tfindhershoes,Shecan’tfindherbag.Canyouhelpher?
S:Yes.
T:Where’reherschoolclothes?
:S:They’reunderthebed.
T:Where’sherEnglishbook?
Canyoufinditonthedesk?
S:No,It’sinherschoolbag.
T:Maybe.Thankyou.Lilycanfindherthingsnow,
andshecangotoschool.
Step2Presentation
Showamapwithmanybuildingsinit
T:Lookatthispicture.Whatplaceisit?
S:Itisabank.
T:Spellit.
Ss:B-A-N-K.
Repeatwithothernewwords
postoffice,park,bank,supermarket,payphone,street
nsolidationanddrill
Showamapandletthempracticeinpairs
Isthere……..
Yes,thereis./No,thereisnot.
Step4Consolidation
1.TellustheroutetoLily’sschool
T：Wherearethey?
教案正文随堂记录
2.Teachtheprepositions
(Memorychallenge)
Whatarethedifferencesbetweenthetwopictures
nextto,acrossfrom,near,between,infrontofbehind
Step5.Task1
Shangtangisdevelopingnow,Ifyouareadesigner，howtodesignthetownofShangtang?
㈠Pleasedrawasimplesketchmapingroupsof4to6.
Step6.Pratice
Step8Homework
1.Pairworks，twostudentsdrawthemap,oneactsasapoliceman,theotheractsasaapersonwhoisasktheway.
2.Finish2a2b
3.Drawasketchmapofyourhometoschoolorthewaytoyourpartner.
PeriodTwo
一.Teachingaims
1.Vocabulary:dirty,old,market,soda,pine.
2.Abilitytarget:
Trainstudents’listeningandspeakingskills.
Trainstudents’communicativecompetence.
3.MoralObject
Everyoneinschooltaketheresponsibilitytokeepourenvironment
Cleanandtidy.
二.KeyPoints
KeyVocabulary.
Targetlanguage
三.Teachingdifficulties
Practicetheadjectivesusingthetargetlanguage
Step1.Revision
AsktworowsofthreestudentstostandfaceCtoCface
inthefrontofintheclassroom.
SASBSCSDSESF
Pointtothestudentinfront.Askandanswerquestionsyourself.
T:WhereisSA?She’snexttoSB.
教案正文随堂记录
T:WhereisSB?He’sacrossfromSE
T:WhereisSE?He’sbetweenSDandSF
Teachhowtogivedirectionswiththemap
turnleftontheleftturnrightontherightgostraightgodown
T：Let’slookatthepicture.
WeknowLily’shouseishere.
HowcanshegettoYongjiaMiddleSchool?
S:Gostraightandturnleft,it’snexttothebank.
Step2Consolidation
Showamap
Askingthewayfordirections.
Excuseme.Whereisthe…..?
Practicethedialogues
Getstudentstoreadthedialoguesbetweenboysandgirlsorpairwork
1.A:Excuseme.Isthereahospitalnearhere?
B:Yes,thereis.Walkalongthisroad,andtakethefirstturningontheright.It’sabouttwentymetersalongontheleft.
A:Thankyoualot.
B:It’sapleasure.
2.A:Excuseme.Isthereahotelnearhere?
B:Yes,thereis.Walkalongthisroad,andtakethesecondturningontheright.It’saboutfiftymetersalongontheleft.
A:Thanksalot.
B:That’sallright.
3.A:Excuseme.Isthereabookshopnearhere?
B:Yes,thereis.Walkalongthisroad,andtakethethirdturningontheleft.It’saboutninetymetersalongontheright.
A:Thanksalot.
B:That’sallright.
4.A:Excuseme.Isthereaparknearhere?
B:No,thereisn’t.Thenearestisaboutsixkilometersaway.You’dbettercatchabus.
A:WhichbusdoIneed?
B:Ithinkyouneedanumber38bus.Thebusstopisalongthatroad,ontheleft.
5.A:Excuseme.Isthereatheatrenearhere?
B:No,thereisn’t.Thenearestisaboutsevenkilometersaway.
教案正文随堂记录
A:WhichbusdoIneed?
B:Ithinkyouneedanumber103bus.Thebusstopisalongthatroad,ontheright.
6.A:Excuseme.Isthereamuseumnearhere?
B:No,thereisn’t.Thenearestisabouteightkilometersaway.You’dbettercatchabus.
A:WhichbusdoIneed?
B:Ithinkyouneedanumber111bus.Thebusstopisalongthatroad,ontheleft.
Step3.Activity.
Goal:Thisactivityprovidesanoralreviewofwhereaplaceis.
Procedures:Inviteastudenttocometothefrontoftheclassroom.Andthendescribeaplacewhichthestudentarefamiliarwith.
Forexample,heorshemaysay,itisonCenterStreet.It’snexttothesupermarket.Whileheorsheisdescribingtheresttaketurnasking.Isitaschool?Isitapayphone?Etc.
Thegamegoesonuntiltheycanguessit.
Step4Listening
Listenandcircletheplacesyouhearin1a.
Listenagain.DrawamapofMachael’sneighborhood.
Step5Homework
Finishofftheexercisesinworkbook.
Haveadictation.
Practiceinpairs.
PeriodThree
一.TeachingAimsandDemands
1.Knowledgeobjects
Reviewallthekeywordspresentedinthisunit.
Readane-mailanddrawaroute.
2.AbilityObject
TrainSs’Readingandwritingskill.
3Moralobjects
Onweekendsorholidays,inviteyourfriendstoyourhousetohaveagoodtime.
4.TeachingKeypoints:Reviewthekeywordsinthisunitread
教案正文随堂记录
ane-mailanddrawaroute.
Step1.3a1.Readcarefullyanddrawarouteaccordingtothematerial.
2.Ssaskandanswerthequestionsbythemselves.Likethis:
Whereisthepark?(It’s…..)
Isitanewhotel?(No,itisnot)
3.GetSstoreadaloud.
Step2.Writing.
1.Finish3b.Lookatthepictureandfillintheblanksforthistourguide.
2.Writeatourguide.
Showsomepicturesofplaces,getSstochooseone,andwriteatourguide.
Askingtheway:
nsolidation
Isthere…?
Whereis…?
Whichisthewayto…?
HowcanIgetto…?
Canyoutellmethewayto…?
Askingtheway
1.Excuseme.Where’sthetheatre?
2.Isthereatheatrenearhere?
3.Canyoutellmethewaytothetheatre?
4.Whichisthewaytothetheatre?
5.HowcanIgettothetheatre?
6.Canyouhelpmefinethetheatre?
PeriodFour
Step1.revision
1.Readthee-mailandtheroute.
2.Askthewayandgivedirections
step2Exercisesinclass
Fillintheblanks
1.There’sacinemanext____theshop.
2.____theleftsideoftheroom,there’sadesk.
3.Pleasecometothefrontandstand____________theclass.
Completethedialogue
A:_______________,whereisthenearestpolicestation,please?
B:I’m_______,Idon’tknow.Please________thatman.
教案正文随堂记录
A:Thankyou______________________.Excuseme,whereisthepolicestation,please?
C:_______overthere,next________thepostoffice.
A:Thankyou_______________.
C:Not_______________.
Askingfordirections
1.请问，去车站怎么走?
uld/Canyoutellmethewaytothestation?
2.请问，去警察局怎么走?
Excuseme.Whichisthewaytothepolicestation?
3.请问，去动物园我该走哪条路?
Excuseme.WhichwayshallItaketothezoo?
4.劳驾，最近的邮局在哪儿?
Excuseme,whereisthenearestpostoffice?
5.请问，你能帮我找到那家水果店吗?
uld/Canyouhelpmefindthefruitshop?
7.劳驾，附近有医院吗?
Excuseme.Isthereahospitalnearhere
8.劳驾，去书店怎么走
Excuseme,howtogettothebookshop?
Step3Gothroughself-check
Step4Haveaquiz
英语六年级教案实用15篇
接下来，我们向您推荐“英语六年级教案”。教师将根据课本的主要教学内容整理出教案课件，您可以开始编写自己的课堂教案课件了。撰写完善的教案课件有助于避免遗漏重要内容。强烈建议您将此页收藏，以便后续阅读！
英语六年级教案(篇1)
单元教材分析单元学情分析
本课时的教学重难点在于让学生学会用英语的比较级，并能熟练的将其运用于实际生活中，询问身边的人或者事物的年龄、身高、重量以及长度并用比较级的句型来回答。本课时的主要语言项目是用英语表述自己的身高和体重，通过A部分五个英语词汇的掌握，把新授词汇融入到新句型当中。教材在Let'sdo部分设计了三位学生的身高比较，让学生通过做动作或实际比较可以很快理解并熟练掌握这些相关内容，达到能实际运用的目的。六年级的学生对英语学习兴趣整体有所下降，两极分化比较严重。所以本学期应做好后进生的转化工作。教师应该面向全体学生，以学生的发展为宗旨，始终把激发学生的学习兴趣放在首位，注意分层教学，引导学生端正学习态度，掌握良好的学习方法，培养学生良好的学习习惯。
单元教学目标：
知识与技能
1、通过第一单元的学习，学生能对身体或事物的高矮、大小、重轻、长短进行描述和问答。
2、四会(听、说、读、写)掌握的单词有：taller, shorter, older, younger, stronger, thinner,bigger, smaller, longer, heavier等。四会掌握的句子有：How tall are you? I’m 164 cm tall.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me. How heavy are you? I’m 48kg.I’m thinner than you, and shorter.
3、能够运用计量单位kg和m，能根据所给的数据，运用比较词than进行事物或身体的比较或描述。
课时教学设计
课题：Unit 1 (第1课时)备课人：上课人：
教学目标：
知识与能力：
1、能听、说、读、写taller、longer、older、younger 、shorter，than单词，发音准确。
2、能听懂问句：how tall are you?i’m1.61meters.能够使用句型：I’m taller, you’re tallerthan me。
3、能够运用新学的内容完成“Do a survey and report”任务.
过程与方法：能在课堂的活动中运用所学的语言进行交际。
情感与价值观：
培养学生学习英语的兴趣，树立学生学习英语的信心
让学生养成积极锻炼身体的习惯。
教学重点：
能听、说、认读taller、longer、older、younger 、shorter单词，发音准确。教学难点：
能读准than并能运用比较级的句型。
教具学具课件准备
录音机、磁带、图片第几课时：1
探索流程个性添加(教学反思)
1.1.warm-up(预习)
(1)日常口语练习
T:Good morning, boys and girls .How are you today?
Ss: I’m fine. Thank you. And you?
T:I’m fine, too. Thank you.
2.Play a game.(打开课件，播放人物图片)
T：Look! I’m tall and old .How about you,...?
S1:I’m thin and short .What’s your father like, ..?
S2:My father is strong and tall.
2. Presentation：
(1).Ask and answer in the class.(两名学生在讲台上比较身高)
T: Who is tall? / Who is short?
Ss: A is tall. / B is short.
T:A is taller than B.
(2).Make some sentences.
引导学生用than和taller表达身边的同学身高情况.
(3).利用课件呈现其他新授单词(longer、older、younger、shorter)然后根据班级学生的情况分别编一个chant。
(4).听磁带朗读let’s learn中的内容，并跟读三遍。
(5).巩固练习。
a看口型，猜单词。
b.抽卡片猜单词。
(6).Pair work
全班四人一小组，根据实际情况灵活运用今天所学习的五个新但词造句，并且能够拿自己与他人进行比较用英语表述出来。
3、Practice：
(1). Do a survey and report.完成表格
(2).句子接龙游戏。
S1:I’m taller than you. S2: I’m stronger than you
(3).主情境图练习。教师指出dinosaur和smaller的意思。
4、homework(家庭拓展)
(1)调查你的好朋友及家人的具体身高。
(2)读背今天所学习的五个新单词和句型。
(3)听录音，仿读。
板书设计作业布置
Unit1 how tall are you?
tall----taller、
long----longer、
old----older、 than
young----younger
short----shorter
(1)调查你的好朋友及家人的具体身高。
(2)读背今天所学习的五个新单词和句型
英语六年级教案(篇2)
一. Teaching Time:
Date:
Lesson Time:
二.Teaching aims and demands:
(一)1. Four skills: month, January, February, March, April.
2. Three skills: January is the first month of the year.
3. Let's make and talk.
制作相册。要求用以下句式进行交流:It’s January. She is skating. In March, the children plant trees.
4. Let's read and chant.
(二)Teaching Affection
1. To promote Ss’ interest and confidence.
2. To teach the Ss how to say the first month to fourth month of the year.
三.Teaching important points and difficult points:
1. Words: month, January, February, March, April.
2. Sentence: January is the first month of the year.
四.Teaching methods:
1. Communication Teaching Method.
2. Direct Teaching Method.
3. Reading and writing.
4. TPR.
五.Teaching aids:
1.准备教师卡片，图片和录音磁带。
2.教师准备硬纸片;数量相等的1～4月的小纸条，按照学生人数准备每人一套。
3.学生准备几张照片，是有1～4月日期的或是能反映出时间的。
六.Lesson type: New Lesson
七.Teaching Steps:
1. Warming-up / Revision (3’)
1)Sing a song: Months of the Year.
2)Review the words : January, February, March, April.
2. Presentation (20 ’)
1)教师提问学生的生日：Whose birthday is in January / February / March/ April? 让生日在1～4月的学生到前边逐个介绍自己的生日，例如：Hi! I'm _.My birthday is in January.让下面的学生注意听，尽力记住每个人的生日月份(不能用笔记录)。然后学生按任意顺序站成一排，让下面的学生凭记忆说出他们的生日。从第一个开始，教师说This is .... Start! 学生开始抢答，答对者得一分。看看谁的瞬间记忆好。
2)把数量相等的1～4月的英语单词分别写在纸条上，然后学生抽签得到自己的月份，按照月份分成小组，以月份名称为组名，如January Group;各小组讨论在自己的月份里有哪些节日，学校有哪些活动，周围的人会进行哪些活动。用英语记下来，不会的可以用图画表示。最后向全班介绍展示讨论结果。
3)Just write.
3. Practice (17 ’)
1)教师请学生分成小组完成学生用书第50页的制作讨论活动。鼓励学生联想以前学过的句型来交流，例：Who is this? Where is he / she? Do you like ... ?
2)Let's read and chant
4. Assessment
Finish the activity book about the lesson.
5. Additional activities/Homework
1)Finish the activity book.
2)设计一张1～4月中节日的贺卡。
八. Blackboard design:
英语六年级教案(篇3)
通过听、说、读、写等形式的语言活动，帮助学生复习本单元的重点词汇和句型，检测学生能否综合运用所学的语言知识和技能进行交流。
A. Listen and match.
开始复习检测前，教师先带领学生复习本单元的主要词汇和句型。然后学生观察A项的图片，熟悉画面，预测听力内容。之后教师就图片提出一些问题，引导学生思考：What are these places? Where are they? How can you get there? What can you do there?
第一遍，让学生整体输入，理解录音内容。第二遍，学生边听边标号。第三遍，学生自查答案。接下来，教师请学生扮演Tony， Lily， Sue， Alan，复述听力内容，如：I‘m Tony. My family went to a city this summer vacation. It’s in the east of China. It‘s famous for West Lake. We went boating and drank Longjing tea.
英语六年级教案(篇4)
unit 1 how do you go there?
第一课时
【教学目标】
1.能够听、说、读、写下列词组：on foot, by bike, by bus, by train.
2.能够听、说、认读词组：by plane, by ship, by subway.
3.能够在现实生活中灵活运用句型“how do you go there?”how do you go to school?
来询问别人的出行方式，并能用句子“i go by…”进行回答。力求发音准确，语调自然。
4能够与小组成员进行对话和聊天。
【教学重点】
1.熟练掌握本单元的重点词组on foot, by bike, by bus, by train.
2. 能够在现实生活中灵活运用句型“how do you go there?”how do you go to school?
来询问别人的出行方式，并能用句子“i go by…”进行回答。
【教学准备】
1.与本课时相关的教学挂图。
2本单位的录音机和教学磁带。
三。教师准备小奖品作为奖励。
【教学过程】
step 1:warm-up
1. greetings
t: good morning boys and girls .glad to see you again!
s: good morning teacher, nice to see you, too!
t: boys and girls, do you like english chants?
s: yes.
教师呈现并**part a部分的“let’s chant”中的图画和录音，教师带领学生边说边做相应的动作。
2.自由对话之后，教师继续说：“there are many ways to go somewhere.
look these pictures ,do you know what they are ? ”
教师把课本“let’s start”上所呈现的交通方式的图画呈现给学生，并问同学们该如何用英语表达？
step2: presentation:
1.教师拿着一张公共汽车的卡片在手里，自问自答：“how do i go to school?
i go to school by bus”并在黑板上写下：by bus。教师再重复刚才的句子并走到同学们中间问一位同学“what about you?
how do you go to school?”学生如果回答：“me too!
”教师就继续问下一名学生，直到有不同的答案，教师帮助学生说出完整的句子：“i go to school by…”并将相应的短语写在黑板上。
2.教师让学生先看挂图，然后听录音，让学生跟读“let’s learn”部分的内容，教师在学生跟读过程中要注意及时矫正学生在语音和语调方面的错误。
step 3: practice
老师让学生们制作简单的单词卡片，一部分是位置，另一部分是交通方式。教师应鼓励学生大胆思考他们的出行方式和去向。然后教师先和一个学生演练给大家看，然后有师生互动转换为生生互动，对于词汇表述上有困难的学生，教师要及时地提供帮助和指导，对一些特别有创意的想法，教师可以写在黑板上加以鼓励，也可发小红花以资奖励。
step 4.summary
教师和学生总结了这节课的教学重点。
step 5.homework
1掌握交通方式的英语表达，并能在实际生活中灵活运用。
2.听let’s try 的录音，根据听到的内容选出正确的答案。
第二课时
【教学目标】
1.能够熟练用英语表达交通方式：on foot, by bike, by bus, by train. by plane, by ship, by subway.
2.能够在现实生活中灵活运用句型“how do you go to school?”usually i go to school on foot.
sometimes i go by bike.力求发音准确，语调自然。
3.能够表述自己的上学方式并简单陈述原因，例如：usually i go to school by bus, because it’s fast.
【教学重点】
1.能够在现实生活中灵活运用句型“how do you go to school?”usually i go to school on foot.
sometimes i go by bike.
2.能够表述自己的上学方式并简单陈述原因，例如：usually i go to school by bus, because it’s fast.
【教学准备】
1.与本课时相关的教学挂图。
2本单位的录音机和教学磁带。
三。教师准备小奖品作为奖励。
【教学过程】
step 1:warm-up
1.上课伊始，老师和学生一起说唱上个课时所学的chant歌谣。
2老师和学生就上节课所学的词汇和句型做一个简单的自由交谈。教师出示单词卡片，提问：
“how do you go to school?”学生根据**内容回答：“i go to school by…”师生互动直到班级里大部分学生能够准确说出图中交通工具的名称以及该句型。
然后学生两人一组用单词卡片练习句型“how do you go to school?”i go to school by…教师对表达仍然有困难的学生要给予个别辅导。
step 2: presentation
1.教师走下讲台，提问学生：“how do you go to school?
”鼓励学生回答，并反问老师“how do you go to school?”，然后教师在黑板上贴上自行车，公共汽车，计程车的**，并分别在后面两幅图的下面标上乘坐**，如：1yuan，10yuan,回答说：
“usually i go to school by bike, because it’s good for my health. sometimes i go by bus, because it’s cheap. sometimes i go by taxi, because it’s fast, but it’s too expensive.
”然后板书四会句子，学生跟读。
2.教师**课本“let’s talk”部分的录音，让学生带着问题“how does sarch go to school? 去听，然后根据听到的内容回答老师的提问。
3.教师再放录音，在每句话后停顿，让学生跟读，教师要注意及时纠正学生在跟读过程中出现的语音、语调方面的错误。
4.跟读完一遍后，教师再放一遍录音，让学生根据刚才老师提出的问题和自己在跟读过程中出现的错误，重新从整体上把握一下。
5.教师和学生一组先做示范练习，根据自己的情况，替换句型中的关键词练习对话，之后由师生合作变为生生合作。教师对表现突出的同学给予表扬。
step 3: practice
1.教师把课本“group work”的教学挂图呈现给学生，让学生模仿图画上的活动方式，四个学生一组，通过提问“how do you go to school?”了解同学用何种交通方式上学，并鼓励学生简单阐述原因，如：
my home is near. it’s fast. it’s cheap.
... 2教师应事先准备一些杂乱无章的单词卡片，让学生在阅读单词后快速写出正确的句子；或者省略关键词和短语，只给出开头的第一个字母作为提示，让学生填空。最后，让学生写出完整的句子。
step 4.summary
教师和学生总结了这节课的教学重点。
step 5.homework
1掌握本课所学的主要句型和短语，
2课后，清点你的家人和朋友通常的交通方式，并准备在下一堂课报告。
【教学目标】
1.能够熟练用英语表达交通方式：on foot, by bike, by bus, by train. by plane, by ship, by subway.
2能理解辅音/p/，/b/，/t/，/d/和元音/i:/，/i/，并能读出相关示例。
三。能充分理解和正确阅读对话，完成对话后的练习。
4学习如何引导他人在不同的地方使用不同的车辆到达某个目的地。
第三课时
【教学重点】
能够完全理解并正确阅读对话。
2学习如何引导他人在不同的地方使用不同的车辆到达某个目的地。
【教学准备】
1.与本课时相关的教学挂图。
2本单位的录音机和教学磁带。
三。教师准备小奖品作为奖励。
【教学过程】
step 1:warm-up
1上课开始时，老师和学生一起用第一节课上学过的圣歌说唱，活跃课堂气氛，让学生快速集中注意力。
2.学生就上节课老师布置的作业，对家人、朋友所采用的交通方式进行信息交换，如my father goes to work buy bus, because it’s cheap. my brother goes to school on foot, because my home is near…教师要对同学们的表现及时做出评价。
step 2: presentation
1老师用简单的笔触呈现两种情况：汤姆家住在山上，山脚下有一条河，河的另一边有一个公共汽车站通向学校；露西的家离学校很远。她家附近有一个地铁站。在她的学校附近有一辆公共汽车直达地铁站的入口。
老师要求学生分组作业，设计出上学的最佳路线。其原理是省时、方便。教师指导学生用连词来表示动作的顺序。
教师要求各组派两个同学扮演简笔画呈现的两个人，到教室前面进行汇报，例如：my name is tom .my school is not near my home.
i go to school on foot, then by boat, and then by bike.
2.教师把“let’s read”部分的教学挂图呈现给学生，让学生看图听录音，然后根据听到的内容画出sarch去公园的路线。
3.教师再放一遍录音，逐句停顿，让学生跟读，教师在学生跟读过程中要及时矫正学生在语音语调方面出现的错误。
英语六年级教案(篇5)
一．学生情况分析：
通过一学期的教学，大多数学生英语学习有进步，英语字写得漂亮了，学习态度有所好转，上学期通过采用边学习新知识和复习旧知识相结合的方法，他们的学习有所进步。但是因为教材衔接有问题，学生学习这套教材有一定难度。
这学期他们将步入六年级的第二学期，学生的学习负担会越来越重，他们将面临着毕业和升中学考试的压力，会把更多的精力放在语文和数学上，因为考中学不考英语，所以家长和学生会更加不重视英语，大多数会放弃英语，干脆不学了。
二，针对情况采取的措施：
针对学生的具体情况，我将采取以下措施：
1， 注重情景教学，创设英语环境，营造学习气氛，使学生有更多的机会接触英语，感触英语，应用英语。
2，结合学生的年龄特点，结合教学内容，设计适合六年级学生的课堂教学活动，调动学生的学习积极性。
3．针对学生记，背单词难这一问题，向学生介绍优秀学生的学习方法，大家互相交流，共同进步。老师向学生介绍一些好方法，如：分类记忆法，滚学球记忆法，想象记忆法等。
我们猜您可能喜欢以下文章： 疯狂英语夏令营助教的实习工作体会雅思考试应注意的十大要点之一：时间是最大的敌人研究支持自动写作评分科技加国商学院学生改选公共部门以寻求工作保障马来西亚全国平均学习成绩持续进步美国教育部发布如何衡量高等教育学习成就的方案加拿大卑诗省推动弹性学年制美国经济下颗未爆弹─学贷债务科技大厂协办新式科技学校泰国坤敬大学校长举办「适应社会」迎新活动 :小学六年级英语下册教学计划
4．对学生进行语音知识训练，教授国际音标，让学生从简单机械地模仿式学习，过渡到有正确的`语音知识知指导英语学习的阶段，也为自学铺路。
5，加强阅读训练和语法知识的渗透学习。
6，渗透英语背景知识的学习，使学生扩大视野，了解国外的风土人情，异国文化，习俗等，进一步了解英语，运用英语 。
7，进一步加强毕业班学生的思想工作，做好小学毕业与中学的衔接工作。
三，教材整体分析：
本学期六年级普通班英语课所使用教材是: 河北教育出版社的《Learning English》第八册，本套教材 充分吸收了世界上最先进的外语教学理论和实践经验，注重学生英语听说读写能力的培养和训练，努力为学习者营造语境，精心设计内容，在教学中安排了大量的有趣的教学活动，引导学生在轻松，积极向上的气氛中学习英语，使英语变的既容易又有趣。它以学生为中心，以主要人物的活动为主线，围绕最常用的，最基本的英语词汇、句型、交际会话等，逐步开展教学内容，符合小学生的年龄、心理特点和语言教学规律，具有很强的科学性。
四,总体教学目标：
1，坚持快乐英语教学法，调动学生学习英语的积极性。
2，巧用英文儿歌、歌谣、绕口令、谚语等训练学生的语音、语调。
3，引导学生运用观察、发现、归纳、实践等方法学习语言知识，感悟语言功能。
4，在训练学生听说能力的同时，加强读写训练。
5，结合学生实际,适当讲解语法知识,做一些练习题和试卷,做好小学升中学的准备工作.
怎样培养六年级学生的英语综合能力？
英语六年级教案(篇6)
一、选出不同类的一项(10分)
( )1、A. new B. jog C. beautiful
( )2、A. air B. old C. healthy
( )3、A. take B. keep C. tree
( )4、A. what B. why C. buy
( )5、A. watch B. see C. water
( )6、A. sea B. Earth C. land
( )7、A. film B. sun C. moon
( )8、A. Sunday B. tomorrow C. Monday
( )9、A. wanted B. dance C. watched
( )10、A. leg B. arm C. body
二、给短语选择相应的汉语意思(20分)
( )1、plant treesA. 保持我们凉爽
( )2、keep the air cleanB. 植树
( )3、keep us coolC. 弹钢琴
( )4、make the place beautifulD. 陆地和河流
( )5、play the pianoE. 单脚站立
( )6、land and riverF. 太空博物馆
( )7、Space MuseumG . 家庭郊游
( )8、stand on one footH. 保持空气清新
( )9、read a story aloudI. 画画
( )10、paint a pictureJ. 大声读故事 三、单项选择(20分)
( )1、Trees can ▁▁▁the air clean.
A. make B. keep C. keeps
( )2、There are ▁▁▁roads and cars.
A. many and many B. many and more C. more and more
( )3、We should look ▁ them before they become big trees.
A. on B. after C. in
( )4、We should ▁▁▁ more trees.
A. plant B. plants C. planting
( )5、You can ▁▁▁ the sea and the land.
A. seeing B. see C. saw
( )6、Last Sunday, peter and his mother ▁to the Space Museum.
A. went B. go C. goes
( )7、Our earth ▁▁like this in space.
A. look B. looking C. looks
( )8、planting trees is good ▁▁▁us.
A. for B. to C. on
( )9、Peter was very interested ▁▁▁film .
A. on B. at C. in
( )10、I move my hands ▁▁▁ the music.
A. at B. with C. on
( )11、(附加题)I enjoy ▁▁▁ trees.
A. plant B. plants C. planting
四、连词成句(20分)
1、fun is trees planting
_____________________________________
2、us cool keep trees can
_____________________________________
3、should we more plant trees
_____________________________________
4、in this space our looks Earth like
_____________________________________
5、watched film a about earth the they
____________________________________
6、wanted to Anne dance
_____________________________________
7、can you dance well very
_____________________________________
8、you can me teach?
_____________________________________
9、again do again let’s it
_____________________________________
10、went he the to library to look for books on space
_____________________________________
五、短文，判断正误，相符写(T)不相符写(F)(10分)
Yesterday ma brother went to cinema with me. The film was very exciting. We liked it very much. The film was about space. A man was talk about space. A man talked about the film. We could see the Earth, the sun and the moon. The Earth goes round the sun. The moon goes round the Earth .We know something about space now.
英语六年级教案(篇7)
目的要求：
1、激发幼儿对本单元儿歌的兴趣，引导幼儿初步感知整首儿歌。
2、培养幼儿协作幼儿友好的同伴交往意识。
3、引导幼儿进行早期自我认知，初步认识无根手指头。
1、教师与幼儿相互用英文问好。
2、教师与幼儿互动，引入主题。
（1）引导幼儿边看动画，熟悉歌曲旋律。
（2）教师出示thumbkin、thumb和pointer、tallman、ringfinger、littlefinger的卡片，提问个别幼儿。
（3）卡片游戏或个别表演游戏。
（1）幼儿分散站立表演歌曲。
（2）教师带幼儿表演歌曲。
2、观看VCD③第一遍教师出示thumbkin、thumb和pointer、tallman、ringfinger、littlefinger的`卡片提问，并请幼儿与教师互动。
3、观看VCD③第二遍集体表演歌曲后，再次出示thumbkin、thumb和pointer、tallman、ringfinger、littlefinger的卡片提问幼儿。
学习正确读准，认识单词daddy、mommy、grandpa、grandma，并了解其含义。
活动准备：
活动过程：
1、 say hello（打招呼）：
师：今天我们班上来了好多客人，小朋友们应该和客人说什么呀？（教师做hello动作提醒幼儿）
师幼共唱《hello song》。
2、 warm up（热身运动）：
肢体动作：stand up， sit down， run， jump， turn around……
3、 teaching（教学）：
①师：do you want to know what’s behind me？你想知道谁在我后面吗？（想）可是啊，它要求小朋友数到3才肯出来呢！我们一起来好吗？show me your hands. one， two， three. 咦，它还是不肯出来，we try to again.我们再来一次。（师互动幼儿举出手指数one， two， three）
②（出示flash card：daddy）who is he？他是谁呢？（幼儿说说）he is my daddy！他是我的爸爸。（幼儿学念：daddy）
（出示flash card：mommy）who is she？她是谁呢？（幼儿说说）she is my mommy.她是我的妈妈。（幼儿学念：mommy）
我们来和daddy， mommy打个招呼吧。say： hello， daddy！ hello mommy！
4、 jumping game：
①以唱歌《where’s my daddy/mommy？》的形式请两位幼儿分别扮作daddy 和mommy。
②教师说明游戏规则。
③教师指挥游戏：教师随机喊daddy或mommy，两名幼儿尝试游戏。
④教师互动其他幼儿喊daddy或mommy，参与游戏幼儿进行jumping game.
5、 say good bye（说再见）。
英语六年级教案(篇8)
一. Teaching Time:
Date:
Lesson Time:
二.Teaching aims and demands:
(一)1. Four skills: May, June, July, August, year.
2. Three skills: May is the fifth month of the year.
3. Let's draw and talk.
分组绘画。要求用以下句式进行交流: When is it? It’s in March. The children are performing.
4. Let's read and chant.
(二)Teaching Affection
1. To promote Ss’ interest and confidence.
2. To teach the Ss how to say the fifth month to eighth month of the year.
三.Teaching important points and difficult points:
1. Words: May, June, July, August, year.
2. Sentence: May is the fifth month of the year.
四.Teaching methods:
1. Communication Teaching Method.
2. Direct Teaching Method.
3. Reading and drawing.
4. TPR.
五.Teaching aids:
1. 准备硬纸片;数量相等的5～8月的小纸条，按照学生人数准备每人一套。
2. 准备图画纸和彩笔。
3. 学生准备几张照片，是有5～8月日期的或是能反映出时间的。
4. 准备教师卡片和录音磁带。
六.Lesson type: New Lesson
七.Teaching Steps:
1. Warming-up / Revision (7’)
伴着Months of the Year这首歌曲，分小组作采访汇报：我们小组最喜欢的月份。
2. Presentation (15 ’)
1)Ask and answer.
T: How many month names have we learnt? Yes, we have learnt four.They are January, February, March, and April.Today we are going to learn four new month names.Do you want to know them? Look!
2)T show the card：This is the fifth month of the year.It's May.领学生读单词，然后读句子：May is the fifth month of the year.
3)用同样的方法学习6月至8月。
4)Play a game:出示5—8月的第一个英语字母，让学生猜是哪一个月份;老师说中文时，让学生说出英语，老师说英语时，让学生说中文，反复练习几次。
5)教师准备放录音：Don't worry.Let's listen to the tape.Listen carefully and try to remember the names of the months.
6)Listen to the tape and repeat.
7)Just write.
3. Practice (20 ’)
1)绘画讨论：
组织学生分组完成课本第53页的活动。可以分成May Group, June Group等。小组讨论自己月份的常见活动，然后用图画表现出来。最后小组成员一起编对话，展示给大家。
2)Let's read and chant.
4. Assessment
Finish the activity book about the lesson.
5. Additional activities/Homework
1)Finish the activity book.
2)收集有关5—8月份的节日等等的信息，并能用简单的几句英语说出来。
八. Blackboard design:
英语六年级教案(篇9)
一、教学目标
1．知识目标
（1）复习表示问候、介绍的用语。
（2）复习祈使句的否定式。
2．能力目标
能够熟练运用句型：What’s your favourite ____? My favourite ____ is …
3．情感目标
培养学生热爱体育运动，积极锻炼身体的良好习惯。
二、教学过程
Note: For this lesson bring at least a basketball and a ping-pong ball. If you plan on doing Part 2 which is optional, you may also want to bring a volleyball and a tennis ball. For Part 2, you will also need pictures of someone swimming, skiing, ice-skating, roller-skating and playing chess.
Step 1 Revision
1 Revise greetings:
T: Hello! My names…. Whats your name?
S: My names….
T: How are you today?
S: Im fine, thanks. And you?
T: Im fine, too.
2 Practise this as an action chain.
3 Check homework.
Step 2 Presentation
1 Draw a picture of a person being hit by a football. As you draw, talk to the students and get them to answer your questions: This is David. Whats this? Its a football. Is it light? No, its heavy, etc.
2 Present this dialogue (you play both parts):
A: Oh, sorry! Are you OK?
David: Yes, Im fine. Please dont worry.
Repeat the dialogue. Get the students to repeat after you.
Step 3 Read and act
1 SB Page16, Part 1, Speech Cassette Lesson 77. Teach ouch and catch. Have the students look at the picture. Ask What are the boys playing? (Let the students guess. Some may already know the word basketball. However, if the students are having a difficult time guessing, teach basketball.) Ask Can you play basketball? Students can answer, Yes, I can or No, I cant.
2 Say Please listen. Play the tape. Ask Can Ling Feng play basketball? Check the answer (No). Play the tape again and have the students repeat.
Step 4 Presentation
1 With books closed, show the basketball. Ask Whats this? Repeat using the ping-pong ball. Say My favourite sport is basketball. I think it is easy and Im good at it. Bring a student who is good at playing sports to the front of the class to help with this demonstration. Say I like to pass the ball. OK? Catch! Pass the ball to the student. Say Thank you for your help. Write the words easy, sport, be good at and pass on the Bb. Teach these words.
2 Ask and write on the Bb Whats Ling Fengs favourite sport? Say Please listen. Play the tape. Check the answer (ping-pong). Play the tape again and have the students repeat.
Step 5 Practice
1 In groups of three, have the students practise and act out the dialogues in Part 1. As they are practising, walk around and give help in pronunciation and intonation.
2 Choose three groups to come before the class and act out their dialogue.
Step 6 Ask and answer
1 SB Page16, Part 2 . This part is optional. Look at the pictures. Point to the picture of someone swimming. Ask What is this person doing? Say swimming. Students repeat swimming. Write swimming on the Bb. Continue in this way for the rest of the pictures. Ask several students, Whats your favourite sport? Get them to answer, My favourite sport is….
2 In pairs, have the students ask each other Whats your favourite sport? and answer, My favourite sport is….
3 Do questions and answers with the whole class. Encourage students to ask you about your favourite sport.
Step 7 Workbook
SB Page 89, Wb Lesson 77, Exx. 1-2. After finding the right pictures for the sentences, get the students to talk about themselves following the example in Ex. 1.Ex. 2 may be done in class as a contest.
Homework
Learn the new words in SB Lesson 77 and act out the dialogues.
Talk about your favourite sports.
英语六年级教案(篇10)
教学目标：
知识与能力：
能听，说，认读单词countryside，lower，shadow，smarter，become
能够了解read and write课文的部分大意
过程与方法：
学生能在任务完成的过程中体会新语言的意义
情感与价值观：
树立学生的环境保护意识。
让学生学会选择低碳生活。
教学重点：
能听懂、会说How heavy are you ?I’m 48 kg.
I’m thinner than you , and shorter .并能在情景中运用。read and write的对话
教学难点：
read and write的对话
教具学具课件准备
有关卡片，磁带等。
探索流程个性添加(教学反思)
1、warm-up(热身)
(1)日常口语练习
(2)let’s sing：my small cat
2、presentation(新课呈现)
(1)Look and tick
播放录音，学生完成练习
(2)用PPT出示日出与日落人影的长短的照片引出课文
(3)生个别读，分段读，
(4)听录音跟读。全班读，并要求学生帮助Wu Yifan回答小鸭子的问题。
3、practice(练习)
完成p9的练习
4、homework(家庭拓展)
(1)听录音朗读read and write
(2)配套练习
(3)预习
板书设计作业布置
Unit 1 How Tall Are You?
Countryside---乡村
Lower---更低地
Shadow---影子
Smarter---更聪明的
Become---变成
(1)听录音朗读read and write
(2)配套练习
(3)预习
课题：Unit 1 (第6课时)备课人：上课人：
知识与能力：
能够完成p9 think and discuss的练习。
能够完成let’s check，let’s wrap it up的练习。
了解形容词比较级的变化规则。
过程与方法：
学生能在任务合作过程中体会新语言的意义
情感与价值观：
1.培养学生概括与总结的能力。
2.让学生对长度、重量、大小的单位能够加以区分以及表达
教学重点：
形容词比较级的变化规则
教学难点：
形容词比较级的.变化规则
教具学具课件准备
有关卡片，磁带等。第几课时：6
探索流程个性添加(教学反思)
1、warm-up(热身)
(1)日常口语练习
(2)复习
2、presentation(新课呈现)
(1)let’s check，学生独立完成练习
(2)let’s wrap it up学生独立完成练习=
3、practice(练习)
小结：⒈单音节形容词和部分双音节词，一般在词尾加-er。
2.以字母e结尾的词，在词尾加-r。
3.重读闭音节词词尾只有一个辅音字母时，先双写该辅音字母，再加er。
4.以"辅音字母+y“结尾的双音节词，先把”y“改为”i“，再加-er。
5.多音节词和部分双音节词，在词前加”more“。
6.部分形容词和副词的比较级是不规则的，如：good/well-better，bad/badly-worse。
4、homework(家庭拓展)
(1)做配套的练习
(2)听录音，仿读
(3)预习
板书设计作业布置
Unit 1 How tall are you?
1.length 2.weight 3.teeth 4.tail 5.food 6.skill 7.seals 8.lobsters9.squid
(1)做本单元活动手册配套练习。
英语六年级教案(篇11)
小学英语教学设计-07-28 21：411、请结合具体的课例谈谈如何确立一课的教学目标1.阅读课标和课标解读，明确课标的要求。我在设计教学人教版三年级英语上册(pep教材)的Unit5 Let's Eat这一课时，我先查阅了新课标中对三年级学生学习英语应达到的目标，然后确立了学生在本节课中的三维目标：知识与技能：1.掌握表达自己喜欢的食物以及为别人提供或请别人吃东西的日常用语：I like…Have some…2.认识5个表食品的单词：chicken,hot dog,hamburger,bread,French fries。2.认真钻研教科书要在学生的认知、情感和能力的培养和提升。因此，我们要根据学情设计教学。比如，我所任教的三年级这个班，没有平行班级，本班25个学生，个个活泼天真，大部分学生学习积极性高，三年的学生刚刚开始学习英语，对于这门学科充满了新奇感，这对老师教学这门学科有着独具的优越性，但是若老师不能很好的利用学生的这一年龄心理特点，给学生留下不好的学习英语的经历，这对学生以后学习英语都会有不好的影响；另外，由于学校地处移民区，所以学生都来自不同地区，语言、文化背景、家庭教育都有差异，也就导致了学生学习态度、学业基础的`差异。在教学设计中确立教学目标时我就为学生精简了新课标中提出的学习目标，以此让学生学习起来轻松愉快，有好的学习效果。3.细致分析学情，做到有的放矢。分析学情，一方面是要分析学生的学习准备情况，了解学生在知识、技能、认识能力、学习动机、现有的与教学内容相对应的情感、价值观现状以及策略方法等方面的实际情况，以便根据学生实际确定教学目标。另一方面是要分析学生的心理特征，根据学生的心理状况确定教学目标。4.查阅相关资料，了解最新的学术成果。教科书观点、内容的更新速度往往滞后于学术研究发展的速度，教学要想常讲常新，就必须要不断的了解最新的学术成果。从某个角度来说，历史教师的比拼，比的是材料多少，谁占有的材料多，谁就能在教学中更胜一筹。2、您认为应如何设计课堂教学中的各环节?请结合课例做具体说明。2、您认为应如何设计课堂教学中的各环节?请结合课例做具体说明(教学过程的设计，通常从五个环节进行：(1).Warm up(热身运动)(2).Revision(复习旧知识的过程)(3).Presentation(新授过程)(4).Practice(知识学会后的一个操练、运用过程)(5).Consolidation(巩固、提高或者是更为实际的运用过程)一般说来，我拿到一篇课文会从以上几个方面进行思考和设计，但这五个方面又不是很清晰地分割开来的，而是相互联系的。下面我将结合自己的一堂课例来谈谈如何设计课堂教学中的各个环节。课题是PEP小学英语五年级下册Unit6 Field Trip BLet's lear一、Warm up(热身运动)Warm up是一堂课的开端，良好的开端是成功的一半，因此，如何在上课前3至5分钟吸引学生的注意力，激发学生的求知欲?怎样把新旧知识有机地结合起来?这些显得十分重要。在Warm up中努力创设快乐新颖的课堂气氛，比如我在上PEP小学英语五年级下册Unit6 Field Trip BLet's learn时，设计了大家一起唱的活动。教师播放五年级下册第四单元Let's chant《What are you doing》歌谣，师生跟随录音演唱歌谣二、Revision(复习旧知识的过程)这个过程在新课前起到一个“温故而知新”的作用，为新知识的出现作好铺垫，打好基础。在这堂课的Revision环节，我先美美地喝杯子中的一口水，问：What am Idoing?学生回答：You are drinking。接着出示单词卡片，复习A Let's learn的词组，引导学生Using the sentences：What is。doing?He/She is。来问答。三、Presentation(新授过程)这是一堂课非常重要的一个环节。我觉得在小学英语阶段直观教学法普遍又有效，提问题法引出新知也是经常会用到的，还有多媒体辅助教学。比如在Unit6 Field Trip BLet's learn的新课呈现时，我就用了以上方法。出示一群人野营的课件，师问：what are they doing?生答：they are having apicnic。拿出一张report图片，what's this?生答：it's areport。What is Sarah doing?生答：she is writing areport。课件出示一片树叶问：what's this?it's aleaf。再出示很多的树叶，学生都会说they are leaves(树叶的单复数在前面已学过)。接着，教师拿出几片树叶，做collecting leaves的动作说：I am collecting leaves(重复)。然后，让学生看课件图片，What is he doing?引导学生说出He is collecting leaves并带读该短语，请学生试着读出该新的单词短语，做到及时纠音。有时为了能使学生更好地掌握这节课所学的知识，教师可以在教完新知后适当地复习前面所学内容，比如我在教完Unit6 Field Trip BLet's learn的所有单词短语后，我就设计了What's missing?活动，先出示所有的词组让学生认读，接着叫他们闭上眼睛，教师快速地抽掉一张，然后叫他们张开眼睛说一说拿张不见了。这样也能起到及时复习新学内容的作用。四、Practice(知识学会后的一个操练、运用过程)在Practice阶段，不能照本宣科，但基于文本的同时要有创新，机械被动地操练只会降低孩子们学习的热情。游戏，竞赛，任务型活动，小组合作活动等等都是很好的操练形式，但要符合教学内容和教学目的。比如，我在Unit6 Field Trip BLet's learn的操练环节，设计了一个趣味游戏Let's play---Can you guess?pair work，一人到讲台前蒙上眼睛，另一人说：I am playing chess。全班同学齐问：What is he/she doing?蒙眼睛的同学使用这样的句型回答：He/She is playing chess。五、Consolidation(巩固、提高或者是更为实际的运用过程在操练后的巩固活动中，我们要给孩子一个新的任务，在这个新任务中可以提炼课文的重点语言，让孩子重新去设计完成自编的对话，达到基于文本又超越文本，活用语言的目的。3、请结合具体的课例谈谈如何设计课堂教学活动?(1)知识与趣味相结合；如Unit5 Let's Eat我设计了Let's talk、Let's play的活动内容，用游戏、谈话、真实食物来激发学生学习兴趣，在快乐的体验中学生不知不觉地就记住了本课的重点词句。(2)时间和空间相结合因为我们的课堂只有40分钟，教师只有50个平方左右大小，所以像全班下座位参加的这样子活动就费时又占用很大空间，所以这样的活动就要尽量避免设计。(3)课本和实际相结合；在Unit5 Let's Eat这一单元的课的教学中，因为好多食物在我们身边可以准备到实物，因此我就带着实物上课，这样就给了学生直观的印象，便于他们记住食物的英语称呼。(4)个体和集体相结合教学活动既要有指名学生参与的活动，还应有全班学生参与的活动。如个人与教师的对话，学生分组的对话或表演。
英语六年级教案(篇12)
1. 写下所编对话 2. 完成相关练习。
板书设计
Unit 4 Integrated skills It’s +adj. to do sth It says that 据说 Sth. happen to sb.某人出了某事
反思
【当堂巩固】
A.选择题：
( )1.Without ___________ a word, he left.
A、saying B、talking C、speaking D、telling
( )2.please ______ who broke the window.
A、look B、find C、find out D、look at
( )3.______ good time they had yesterday!
A、How B、How a C、What D、What a
( )4._______ useful information it is!
A、How B、how a C、what D、what a
( )5.Each of the students ________ an English book.
A、has B、have C、there is D、there are
( )6.There _______ a pair of red ______ under the chair.
A、is, shoe B、is, shoes C、are, shoes D、are, shoe
( )7.These aren’t ________ cards, they’re_______
A、ours, their B、our, theirs C、our, their D、ours theirs
( )8.It ______ him an hour to play basketball every day.
A、spends B、took C、costs D、takes
( )9.Does this book belong to ______?
A、me B、mine C、I D、my
( )10.______knows anything about him, because he never tells us _____ about him.
A、Nobody, something B、Nobody, nothing
C、Nobody, something D、Nobody, anything
B.根据句意或用括号中所给词的适当形式填空：
1. Sandy likes traveling very much, she wants to be a ______ (导游 )when she grows up.
2. How many______ are there in a man’s body? 206.
3. There are______ (goldfish)in the tank. How lovely they are!
4. How many ______ are there in a minute? Sixty.
5. ______ (be) everything ready for your fact sheets?
C.动词填空：
1. I’m frightened of ______ (travel) by plane.
2. What ________ (happen) to you just now?
3. Thank you for _______(write )to me.
4. It’s interesting ________ (look) after the baby.
5. It ______(take) us 3 hours _______ (finish) the work yesterday.
6. I will go to the library ________ (learn) some animals.
7. Andy is crazy about ________ (dance).
8. The following Saturday, we _________(visit) the great museum.
9. He always practises ________(speak) English in or out of class.
Pronunciation
【自学探究】
(上课前预习一下课文，对你可有帮助啦，行动起来吧!)
一、试着读出下列单词：
opened worked searched needed listened
enjoyed loved played shopped visited
二、根据所给汉语提示写出单词：
1. We heard a_______(奇怪的) noise
2.The police are_______(搜索)the forest carefully
3. “Does that key _______(属于)to Sandy?” “Yes, it does”
4. Daniel is a very _______ (努力的)student.
5. What fine_______(天气)! Let’s go for a walk.
英语六年级教案(篇13)
上完课后，我对这节课进行了反思。这节课基本上是以“任务型教学模式”进行教学，在设计和实施的过程中，做到了尽可能地在活动中去完成。如：在巩固前面所学的重点词汇和句型中，我运用了歌谣、游戏(快速配音)、哑剧表演这三个活动，做学生中玩中。在呈现新课时，我设置情境，请一位学生表演了“I feel sick, I have the flu.” 然后设计了任务进行小组，通过后，对得了“流感”的一些病征和处理的方法有了一定的了解后，带着问题：How do you feel when you have the flu? What do you do if you have the flu? 指导学生阅读短文，用简单明了的图片理出文章的线索，分化篇章难点，帮助学生理解文章大，引导学生边思考边阅读文章。解决了文章的大意和后。为了训练学生的拼读能力，我又进一步引导自己拼读新单词：people, know, have the flu, have some medicine，学生掌握的效果良好。为了让的容量增大，我进一步拓展了Good to know 的知识，最后完成一篇课外阅读，再一次训练孩子们的阅读速度和理解能力，同时也增大了课外知识，同时也是巩固对新知识的理解和运用。
不足的地方：
1、小组时，任务不够明确，导致孩子们的有点偏离了任务。这给我的启示是，在设计小组任务时，一定要让学生明确任务和做法，同时要考虑到“任务”与真实生活中的任务有相似之处，任务应该侧重语言的内容大于语言的形式结构，让学生在“做事”的过程中语言。
2、孩子们“做事”的速度仍有待训练，效率有待提高。原计划要完成两篇简短的阅读，但由于各个环节把握的时间没控制好，导致没有完成第二篇的阅读。因此，在今后的教学中，我更要注意“任务”的真实性和完成“任务”的效率性。
英语六年级教案(篇14)
课题：Unit 1 (第6课时)备课人：上课人：
知识与能力：
能够完成p9 think and discuss的练习。
能够完成let’s check，let’s wrap it up的练习。
了解形容词比较级的变化规则。
过程与方法：
学生能在任务合作过程中体会新语言的意义
情感与价值观：
1.培养学生概括与总结的能力。
2.让学生对长度、重量、大小的单位能够加以区分以及表达
教学重点：
形容词比较级的变化规则
教学难点：
形容词比较级的变化规则
教具学具课件准备
有关卡片，磁带等。第几课时：6
探索流程个性添加(教学反思)
1、warm-up(热身)
(1)日常口语练习
(2)复习
2、presentation(新课呈现)
(1)let’s check，学生独立完成练习
(2)let’s wrap it up学生独立完成练习=
3、practice(练习)
小结：
(⒈)、单音节形容词和部分双音节词，一般在词尾加-er。
(2)、以字母e结尾的词，在词尾加-r。
(3)、重读闭音节词词尾只有一个辅音字母时，先双写该辅音字母，再加er。
(4)、以"辅音字母+y“结尾的双音节词，先把”y“改为”i“，再加-er。
(5)、多音节词和部分双音节词，在词前加”more“。
(6)部分形容词和副词的比较级是不规则的，如：good/well-better，bad/badly-worse。
4、homework(家庭拓展)
(1)做配套的练习
(2)听录音，仿读
(3)预习
板书设计作业布置
Unit 1 How tall are you?
1.length 2.weight 3.teeth 4.tail 5.food 6.skill 7.seals 8.lobsters 9.squid
(1)做本单元活动手册配套练习。
英语六年级教案(篇15)
（1）能听懂会说认读本单元关于形容词比较级的单词。
（2）能听、说、读、写Let’s learn中黑体部分的内容和Read and write中要求的内容。
（3）能用目标语言完成本单元的任务型活动。
（4）能学说Chant一首和Song一首。
（5）了解ei/ai/oi，p/b,t/d的发音特点，并能试着拼读简单的规则词。
（1）能听、说、读、写单词及短语：taller stronger older younger shorter heaiver thinner longer bigger smaller句型：How tall are you ?I’m 164cm.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me .How heavy are you ?I’m 48 kg. I’m thinner than you , and shorter .
（2）能够听、说、读Part A、Part B部分Let’s learn、 Let’s talk中的单词和句子。
（3）了解Story time 、Good to know等部分的内容。
（4）了解字母ei/ai/oi，p/b, t/d在单词中的基本读音。
（1） 情感态度：培养和保持学生学习英语的积极态度和学习信心，引导学生养成良好的英语学习习惯。
（2） 学习策略：加强学生英语学习策略的培养，为学生的终身学习奠定基础。
（3） 文化目标：培养学生文化意识，帮助学生养成良好的.日常行为习惯。
1、 能够听、说、认读本课时的主要词组：taller stronger older younger shorter。
2、 能认读句型：How tall are you ?I’m 164cm.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me .
1、重点掌握形容词比较级的构成。
2、难点是对新句型 How tall are you ?I’m 164cm.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me .的理解和运用。
1、 教师准备本课时所需的六张词卡。
2、 教师准备录音机和录音带。
（1）教师在黑板上贴上一些人物的图像，让学生分辨Who is tall /strong/old/young/short?，然后让学生回答。
（1）教师指着比较高的Tom和比较矮的Wuyifan问Who is tall ?S:Tom.T:Tom is taller than Wuyifan ,用动作来示意学生，帮助学生理解。然后出示taller的单词卡片，示范读taller.
（2）教学单词taller，边说边做动作，学生跟做。开火车合拼单词,小组比赛快速熟练的拼读。帮助学生用tall+er来记忆。简单介绍形容词的比较级第一种情况是在形容词的后面直接加“er”.本课时的几个单词都属于这种变化。
（3）教师用同样的方法教学其他四个四会单词strongerolderyoungershorter
（4）将五张单词卡放在一起请学生认读。男女比赛谁读错或不会读将扣去相应男女组的分数。
（5）教师把一高一矮的学生叫他们站起来，然后说You’re taller than your classmate! 引导学生做出相应的回答：Yes!教师问，How tall are you ?学生答I’m 160cm.学习let’s chant.(听磁带，分句练。)
（6）加强练习、巩固。
（1）做本单元A Let’s learn部分的活动手册配套练习。
1、 能听懂、会说“How tall are you ?I’m 164cm.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me .并能在情景中运用。
2、 能通过询问调查完成一张timetable.
1、 本课时的教学重点是：能听懂、会说“How tall are you ?I’m 164cm.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me .并能在情景中运用。
2、 本课时的教学难点是：能通过询问调查完成一张timetable.
1、 教师准备若干张图片。
2、 教师准备录音机与磁带。
3、 教师准备该课时的教学挂图。
(2)指名读d taller stronger older younger shorter新学五个单词。
（1）How tall are you ? I’m 164cm tall.引导学生回答。然后完成Let’s start (P2)
（2）做完后教师根据图片问How tall are you？请学生来回答。同样问：How heavy are you?…再请学生问，老师回答后接着说：Who is taller than you ?请比较好的学生回答此问题。教师示范操练问句，教师问学生答，男女生互问，互答。再板书How tall are you ?I’m 164cm.You’re shorter than me. You’re 4cm taller than me .请学生做替换练习。
九年级英语上册教案15篇
教案课件是老师上课做的提前准备，因此想要随便写的话老师们就要注意了。 学生的反应可以反映教学质量，什么样的教学课件才是好的？今天幼儿教师教育网编辑为大家推荐了一篇与“九年级英语上册教案”相关的好文阅读，所列举信息仅供参考请依据实际情况做出判断！
九年级英语上册教案【篇1】
Unit 1 The Changing Word
Topic 1 My hometown has become more and more beautiful.
SectionA
【学习目标】
1.掌握现在完成时的构成，初步了解其用法，并学会运用have/has been to 和have/ has gone to 结构：
2.比较并找出一般过去时与现在完成时的不同用法；
3.学会描述假期生活。
【预习案】
一、读1a，完成1b的表格所缺的地点
二、 在文中找到，划出并背诵下面的短语和句子
1.变化的世界________________________________ 9.一个合适的地方________________10.拍照________
2.长假过后__________________________________ 11.提高我的英语水平__________________________
3.度过一个愉快的暑假________________________ 12.顺便问一下___________13.根据1a的内容________
4.从…回来__________________________________ 14.孩子们的假期经历__________________________
5.巨大的变化_________________6.发生____________ 15.查出…和…的不同__________________________
7.越来越漂亮________________________________ 16.填空_____________________17.感觉舒服________
8.如此(那么)多的人___________________________ 18.患感冒______________19.很长时间_____________
【探究案】
一、 语法重点导入--- (根据句意在横线上填入谓语动词的适当形式)
1. He ______________ (play) soccer on the playground now.
2. He ______________ (play) soccer on the playground yesterday.
3. He ______________ (play) soccer on the playground when I saw him yesterday.
4. He ______________ (play) soccer on the playground every day.
5. He ______________ (play) soccer on the playground tomorrow afternoon.
6. He ______________ (play) soccer on the playground 注意（6）句中的时间状语，看P118现在完成时讲解, 总结现在完成时用法
总结：
(1) 现在完成时中谓语动词的形式是---________________________ 看P140-142过去分词表，做P3---1b
(2) 经常搭配的时间副词有: just, already, yet, ever, never, before…
(3) 现在完成时句型转换
写出（6）句的否定句：___________________________________________________________________ 写出（6）句的一般疑问句并肯定回答：_____________________________________________________ 写出（6）句的划线提问句：_______________________________________________________________ 写出（6）句的反意疑问句：_______________________
(4) 观察1a中出现的现在完成时的句子并翻译理解
1. You have just come back from your hometown. 译：_________________________________________________
2. Great changes have taken place there. 译：_________________________________________________________
3. My hometown has become more and more beautiful. 译：_____________________________________________
4. Where have you been? I have been to Mount Huang with my parents. 译：________________________________
5. Where’s Maria? She has gone to Cuba to be a volunteer. 译：___________________________________________
(5) 现在完成时考点：have / has been to --- have / has gone to
练习：参看P118现在完成时讲解，完成P2(2)
区别：have / has been to表示曾经______________,现在_____________;
have / has gone to表示已经______________,现在______________.
二、在文中划出下面的句子并分析
注意： taken是take的______________形式
点拨：change有名词/动词两种词性，名词词意是_________/__________等; 动词词意是_________
1take place --- 发生、举办，指非偶然性事件的―发生‖，即这种事件的发生一定有某种原因或事先的安排 区别：happen --- 发生、碰巧，一般用于偶然或突发性事件
注意：take the place of…--- 取代某人的`位置
练习：a. Jason ___________________________ Miss Li to teach us French next term.
b. The Olympic Games of 2008 ________________________ successfully in Beijing.
c. What ___________________________ to you yesterday?
’思考：so…that…意思是__________,引导_______状语从句 区别：so that…意思是_______,引导_______状语从句 练习：a.为了拍照，他爬得很高。____________________________________________________________________ b.他他爬得那么高，以至于能拍照。____________________________________________________________
3. There goes the bell. 译：_____________________________ 思考：这是个there提前引起的__________句 回忆：副词here, there 提前到句首要引起主谓倒装，但是当主语为人称代词时不倒装。
练习：a. Here comes the No.31 Bus. 译：________________________b. There they are. 译：___________________
c. Jim跑过来了。译：___________________________ d.他跑过来了。 译：____________________________ 拓展：看课本P105注解写出(3)句的同义句a.__________________________ b.____________________________
【归纳】
一、 根据首字母提示完成单词，使句子完整通顺。
1. The b______ is ringing. Let’s begin our class.
2. She has made great p______ in English with the help of her teacher.
3. Miss Lin decided to help Mary as she f______ sorry for her.
4. By the w______, where’s your library?
5. I have been to an English training school to i______ my English.
二、 根据句意及汉语提示完成单词或短语。
1. We have just ______ (回来) from London.
2. They were very tired. I ______ (同情) for them.
3. We haven’t seen our English teacher ______ (很长一段时间).
4. Where is Lin Mei? I have ______ (告诉……一些事) her.
5. He ______ (已经去) New York, in the USA.
三、 用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. —Why is the room so clean?
—Because I ______ just ______ (clean) it.
2. Wang Hai spent a whole night ______ (work) on the computer.
3. They have no house ______ (live) in.
4. My father ______ (be) to the People’s Park many times, so he knows it very well.
5. I heard Lin Hong ______ (sing) a song when I went past.
2 / 195
SectionB
【学习目标】
1.继续学习现在完成时的用法；
2.比较新旧社会青少年的生活状况，启发同学们珍惜新社会的幸福生活。
【预习案】
一、读1a，回答下面的问题
1. Has Maria taken part in some volunteer activities during the summer holidays? __________________________
2. What has she done? _____________________________________________________________________________
3. What does she think of it? ________________________________________________________________________
二、 读2a, 完成2b
三、 在文中找到并划出下面的短语
1.参加…_______________________ 20.过着艰苦的生活______________________________
2.志愿者活动________________________________ 21.详细地描述…__________________________
3.在暑假期间________________________________ 22.支付他们孩子的教育经费______________________
4.残疾儿童__________________________________ 23.度过他们的童年______________________________
5.为…打扫房间______________________________ 24.为了…__________25.support their families________
6.喂他们吃饭____________7.为他们做饭___________ 26.做童工_________________________
8.一段美好的经历_______________________________ 27.日日夜夜_______________________
9.从…学到很多_________________________________ 28.足够的吃的__________________________________
10.the different forms of the verbs___________________ 29.现在的青少年________________________________
11.做一个关于…的调查__________________________ 30.飞速地发展__________________________________
12.make conversations_____________ 31.为贫困家庭提供帮助__________________________
13.跳绳______________14.网上聊天_______________ 32.受到很好的教育______________________________
15.暑假补课_________________________ 33.随着中国的发展______________________________
34.leisure activity___________35.a balanced diet______ 16.做农活___________________________
36.play musical instruments_____________ 17.一篇有关青少年的文章________________________
37.some other training__________________18.世界各地__________________19.过去___________
【探究案】
一、在文中划出下面的句子并分析
1. You have taken part in some volunteer activities during the summer holidays, haven’t you?
译：___________________________________________________________________
思考：haven’t you? 构成了句子的_____________部分
练习：根据时间状语的变化写出谓语动词的不同形式并完成后面的反意疑问句
a. He ____________(take) part in some volunteer activities during the last summer holidays, ________________? b. He ____________(take) part in some volunteer activities during the next summer holidays, ______________?
c. He ___________(take) part in some volunteer activities during the summer holidays every year, ________________? d. He must ________(take) part in some volunteer activities during the summer holidays every year, ______________?
2. What a wonderful experience! 译：________________________ 同义句：How _______________________ 感叹句转换练习：（根据P5---1a的图下提示词用what和how写感叹句）
a. 多么狭窄的公路啊！What______________________________! / How___________________________________! b. 多么艰苦的生活条件啊！What___________________________! / How__________________________________！ 注意：如果对行为动词感叹，只能用How引导！ c. 看！他跑得是多么快啊！_________________________________!
3. Though I had no time to travel, I still felt very happy. 译：_______________________________________________ 思考：你能将上句改为用but的形式吗？______________________________________________________________ 看课本P105注解并总结：though和__________引导______________从句，语气较弱，不与__________连用； ___________________和___________________也用于引导______________从句，带有强调的意味，语气较强。
4. Is that so? 译：________________________ 区别：Is that all? 译：________________________
链接：a. Do you think it’ll rain soon? I think so. 译：_____________________________________________________ b. Do you believe China will become No.1 in the world one day? I believe so. 译：________________________ 拓展：我希望如此___________________ 我猜是这样的____________________
注意：I hop not. _____________________ I don’t think so.____________________
5. In order to help support their families, they had to be child laborers.
思考：你能将上句改为…so that…形式吗？____________________________________________________________ 总结：in order to + 动词原形，在句子中做目的状语；so that 后面引导的是目的状语从句
练习：为了赶上早班车，他们起得很早。a.____________________________________________________________ b._________________________________________________________________________________________
【归纳】
一、 根据汉语提示完成句子，每空一词。
1. His parents couldn’t afford his ______ (教育).
2. The government gives ______ (帮助；赞助) to poor families.
3. With the ______ (发展) of China, many more children live a happy life.
4. I think we can ______ much ______ (向……学习) the farmers.
5. To make us understand what has happened, he told us about the accident ______ ______ (详细地).
二、 用所给词语的适当形式填空。其中一项是多余的。
describe, feed, though, article, education, develop
1. Li Ming failed in the exam again ______ he tried really hard.
2. China is the largest ______ country in the world.
3. The police asked her ______ the two men.
4. Mike, you come from the countryside. Have you ever ______ sheep?
5. In the past, many children couldn’t get a good ______.
三、单项选择。
1. —Have you ever been ______? —Yes. I have been to Australia.
A. abroad B. alone C. here D. healthy
2. —The radio says it’s going to rain. —______ Bad luck! We can’t go for our picnic.
A. Is that so? B. Thank you. C. Don’t worry. D. Pardon?
3. ______ it rains heavily, ______ farmers are still working in the fields.
A. Though; but B. Though; still C. Though; / D. Although; but
4. Athletes from more than 200 countries ______ the 2008 Olympic Games in Beijing.
A. took part in B. attended C. joined D. held
5. China is still a ______ country at the present time.
A. developed B. more developed C. highly developed D. developing
SectionC
【学习目标】
1.继续学习现在完成时；；
2.对比新旧北京，了解中国发生的重大变化；
3.同学们要珍惜现在的美好生活。
【预习案】
一、先看图，再读1a，完成1b（写出每段的段意）
二、 在文中找到并划出下面的短语
1. infer the main idea________________________ 18.接受良好的教育_____________________________
2. the key words______________3. at present_________ 19.与…保持联系_________________________（P105）
4. compare your idea with Kangkang’s_______________ 20.远方的亲戚_________________________________
5.狭窄的公路___________________________________ 21.通过书信和电报的方式________________________
6.又小又黑的房子_______________________________ 22.改革开放____________________________________
7.艰苦的生活条件_______________________________ 23.变得更加高大明亮____________________________
8.简洁而缓慢地通讯_____________________________ 24.改善很多____________________________________
9.宽阔的环形公路_______________________________ 25.享受更加多样的业余活动______________________
10.高大而明亮的楼房____________________________ 26.不但…而且…_______________________
11.舒适的生活条件______________________________ 27.在互联网上______________28.另外还有_________
12.more kinds, quick and easy communications 29.变得更加简单而快捷__________________________
___________________________________________ 30.传真机_________________31.等等…____________
13.my report on Beijing___________________________ 32.取得飞速的进步______________________________
14.四十多年____________________________________ 33.成功地举办奥运会_____________________
15.(她)亲眼目睹北京的变化______________________ 34.记住过去_________________________
16.在20世纪60年代____________________________ 35.立足现在_________________________
17.有机会干…__________________________________ 36.展望未来_________________________
【探究案】
一、在文中划出下面的句子并分析
1. Usually, a big family were crowed in a small house.
译：________________________________________________
点拨：crowd --- 拥挤, 挤,聚集(动词)；人群，群众；一群(名词) crowded --- 拥挤的(形容词)
练习：a. There is a crowd of people in the hall.
译：________________________________________________
b. He succeeded in crowding into the train.
译：______________________________________________
c. Look! A crowd of ants are crowded in the hole.
译：_________________________________________
注意：拥挤的交通不能直译为 crowded traffic, 而是__________ /___________traffic
2. Life was so hard that people had no time or money to enjoy leisure activities.
思考：你能将上句改为too…to形式吗？
Life was _______ ______ ______ people ______ ______ time _______ money to enjoy leisure activities.
提高：The bed is so small that Tom can’t sleep well on it.
_____________________________________________
3. China has developed rapidly since the reform and opening-up.
译：_________________________________________
九年级英语上册教案【篇2】
新课程标准感知
知识要点 本单元用虚拟句谈论一些假设的情况
本单元要点如下
1． 学会谈论一些假设的、虚幻的情况；
2． 达到如何使用虚拟句提出建议的目标；
3． 学会表示与现在的情况相反的虚拟语气的结构；
4． 学会用虚拟语气表述自己的还没有实现的愿望
一.重点词汇
million、pimple、energetic、confident、shirt、tie、medical、research lottery、million、
trouble、energetic、confident、in public、social
二.重点短语
1. won the lottery 赢得抽奖 2. in public 公共的、公众的
2. in the slightest 一点也；根本 4. plenty of 很多的、足够的
get along with 与…相处 6. let …down 使…失望、沮丧
7. come up with 提出、想出（问题） 8. medical research 医学研究
9. what if 如果…怎么办 10. be late for 迟到…
11. be nervous 紧张的 12. get nervous （变得）紧张的
13. take a long walk 散步 14. ask one’s permission 征求某人的许可
15. without permission 没得到许可 16. introduce oneself 自我介绍
17. rather than 而不是 18. a circle of good friends 朋友圈子
三.交际用语
1. If I were you , I’d wear a shirt and tie. 如果我是你，我就会穿衬衫打领带。
2. If I were you , I’d take an umbrella. 如果我是你，我就带把伞。
3. What would you do if you won a million dollars ? 如果你赚了一百万美元，你会做什么？
4. What if I don’t know anyone ? 如果我一个人也不认识怎么办？
5. You should eat lots of fruits and vegetable and drink lots of water.你应该吃大量水果、蔬菜，大量喝水。
6. What are you like ? I think I’m outgoing. 你的性格如何？我想我很外向。
四.语法聚焦
What would you do if you won a million dollars ？
I’d give it to medical research .
I can’t sleep the night before an exam .What should I do ？
If I were you , I’d take a long walk before going to bed .
第一课时
Section A
Step 1 Free Talk
Talk about good habits of the students. Say, “ Wd all have some good habits. Can you tell the other students what good habits you have.” For example, getting up early, reading, helping others, not wasting money, etc.
When they talk, write some on the blackboard. Get the students to think about if they don’t hav have these good habits what will happen.
Step2 Talking and writing
Say, “Please imagine, what would you do if you had a lot of money?” The students discuss with the partners. Then get them to write some other situations in the list and share the answers. Point out: The sentences here are imaginary situations. They may not come true, just imaginary. So we often use the past tense and “would ” to express this kind of situation.
Step 3 Listening and talking
1b. First talk about some information in the picture. Say, “ We are going to listen to a conversation about their ideas about how to spend a million dollars.”
Students listen to the tape and number the pictures.
Then help the students practice the similar dialogue simply in 1c.
Step 4 Listening
First ask “ What would you do if you went to a party? What would you wear? What would you bring? What would you feel if you don’t know anyone at the party?”
After talking about the questions, come up with the question in 2a “ Why is Larry nervous?” Then listen.
2b. Listen again. Check the four things Larry’s sister says to him. Then check the students’ answers.
Step 5 Pairwork
According to the listening Text above, get the students to practice the conversation by looking at the instruction in 2c.
Ask some pairs to act out their own dialogues.
第二课时
Step 1 Free talk
Say “Imagine, what would you do if you were very old?”
“What would you do if you were teachers?”
“ What would you do if you had a lot of money?”
Get the students to talk about the questions. Collect their answers and write some on the blackboard.
Step 2 Grammar Focus
Point out the sentences on the blackboard all belong to imaginary situations. Ask the students to find out the rules in the sentences. Then look at the sentences in Grammar Focus. Comprehend them. Talk about some information about imaginary situations.
Step 3 Reading and watching
Ask “ Do you have some trouble during your daily life?” The students talk about their trouble and ask the other students to give advice. Then 3a, ask the students match each problem with the correct advice. Check the answers. Then comprehend the sentences.
Step 4 Game
Ask the students to write their problems on a piece of paper. Ask one student to choose some paper with problems on and read the problems. After he / she reads one problem, the other students try to give advice by using “ You should…” or “ If I were you…”.
Exercises:
完成句子：
1. He doesn’t know ______________( 穿什么) at the party.
2. _____________ (如果我是你), I would buy a small present.
3. What would you do ______________ (如果你获得了第一名)？
4. You’d take a long walk ______________ (在吃过晚餐之后).
5. I ______________(变得紧张) before big exams.
第三课时
Section B
Step 1 Word competition
Say “ We usually use adjectives to describe a person. Do you know those words? Let’s have a competition.”
Get representatives of boys and girls to come to the front and write the words about description on the blackboard as many as they can.
Step 2 Giving definitions
Say “ Just now we had the word competition. Then let’s try to give definitions of these words in English.” Discuss with partners and give definitions.
Step 3 Writing and competition
Get the students to understand the instructions in 1a. Understand the meaning of every word. Then fill in the blanks with the words. Check the answers.
After students write the words, have a competition of making up sentences. Say, “ Please make up sentences by using these words. Let’s see who can make up more sentences , boys or girls?”. Then do it.
Step 4 Listening
2a. At first help the students understand the instruction. Look at the personality survey. Explain “ give a speech, without permission, introduce oneself to sb.” Then listen. Check the questions Celia asks.
Some points:
1. give a speech = make a speech, give a talk 演讲
2. without permission （未经允许） with permission （经过允许）
permission n. “允许” permit v. “允许”
permit sb to do sth 相当于allow sb to do sth 意思是“允许某人做某事”
例：The teacher didn’t permit us to swim in this river.
= We can’t swim in this river without the teacher’s permission.
3. introduce oneself to sb. 意思是“向某人自我介绍”
例：Let me introduce myself to you. I am Jim.
2b. Listen again. Circle Bill’s responses. Then check the answers.
Step 5 Practice
Get the students to practice the similar conversation in 2c by looking at the personality survey.
Exercises:
翻译句子：
1． 他害怕在公众场合讲话。
2． 这个女孩很善交际。她有许多朋友。
3． 莫扎特是个很有创造力的音乐家。
4． 男孩们总是精力旺盛。他们几乎从不感觉到累。
第四课时
Step 1 Free talk
Ask questions like “What would you do if the teacher asked you to give a speech in front of the whole school? What would you do if someone took away your things without permission? What would you do if someone asked you to be in a movie? What would you do if you wanted to be friends with a new student?”
Get the students to talk about them.
Step 2 Reading
Ask the students to read the passage in 3a and fill in the blanks in the results with “a”, “b” or “c” according to the survey in 2a. Then help the students comprehend the whole passage.
Some points:
1. pretty ① 相当，非常 相当于very, quite
② 漂亮 相当于beautiful
2. in the slightest 意思是“根本，一点也”
not….in the slightest 意思是“根本不，一点也不”，相当于not…. at all.
slight 是adj. 表示“轻微的，不重要的”
例：I have a slight cold. 我有点轻微的感冒。
3. company ① 陪伴 （不可数n.）
② 公司 （可数n.）
例：I feel at home in your company. 和你在一起令我轻松自在。
He is a driver in a bus company. 他是一家汽车公司的司机。
4. rather than, would rather…than 意思是“与其……倒不如”，“宁愿…...而不愿”
例：I want to stay at home rather than go to school.
I would rather stay at home than go to school.
这两个短语前后都连接两个相同的成分。
After explaining the points, ask the students to read the passage.
Step 3 Groupwork
Divide the students into several groups with four students in each. Design a personality survey according to the example in 3b. The survey must include at least two questions. Then discuss about the questions with the group members.
At last share the students’ answers and make a conclusion, such as “Student….. is very outgoing. Student … is very friendly” and so on.
Homework:
Recite the passage in 3a.
第五课时
Step 1 Warming up
Ask the students make examples about good or bad personality. Discuss about the personality the students like.
Step 2 Self check
For Ex 1, fill in each bland with the correct word given. Understand the Chinese meaning of every sentence.
For Ex 2, read the e-mail and comprehend it.
Then read the passage. Write a reply according to this email. Ask some students to read their replies.
Step3 Just for fun
Students read the funny cartoons at last.
第六课时
Step 1 Warming up
Talk about the questions “ Do you often surf the Internet? Do you have a net friend? What would you do if the net friend wanted to meet you?”
Step 2 Reading
Say “ In our daily life, we would meet lots of situations. And what would you do if something happened? Then let’s study the passage.”
Give a reading task to the task to the students. “ Find out all the accidents and problems in the reading text.” After the students finish the task, help them comprehend the passage.
Some points:
1. If I were you, I’d have a first-aid…..
此句使用了虚拟语气，对现在的事情进行假设，表示与现在事实相反的一种假设。此时，主句中谓语动词使用“should / would + v原形”的结构。If从句中谓语动词使用一般过去时态，如果该动词是be动词，则一律用were.
例：If I knew this, I would tell you.
2. burn-burned – burned 或burn – burnt – burnt 意思是“烧伤，烧坏”
例：The house is burning.
如果表示“被烧死”，则常用be killed by fire / in the fire, 也可用be burnt to death.
3. injure “伤害，损伤”，指事故中肉体上受到伤害，也指精神上的损伤，常用人作主语。
例：She was badly injured in an accident.
4. hurt “疼痛”，可用疼痛的具体部位作主语，也可用人作主语。
例：My head hurts.
She hurt herself yesterday.
Read the passage, and finish 3b.
九年级英语上册教案【篇3】
1. Where have you been, Jane? 你去过哪里，简?
2. She has gone to Cuba to be a volunteer.她去古巴当志愿者了。
3. There goes the bell. 铃响了。
4. Though I had no time to travel, I still felt very happy.虽然我没有时间去旅行，但是我仍然感到很开心。
5. Now our country has developed rapidly.现在我们国家发展迅速。
e.g. You have just come back from your hometown.
2. 现在完成时态的句式:
e.g. (1) I have been to Mount Huang with my parents.
(2) I haven’t seen him for a long time.
(3) Where have you been?
(4) ——Have you ever cleaned a room? ——Yes, I have. / No, I haven’t.
3. have/ has been与 have/has gone 的区别
have/has been to sp.表示曾经到过某地—— have/has gone to sp.表示已经去了某地
e.g. (1) I have been to Mount Huang with my parents. (2) She has gone to Cuba to be a volunteer.
九年级英语上册教案【篇4】
Unit 2.
plain to …… about …… 向 ……抱怨……
74.post sth. for sb. 替某人寄某物
ok/make dinner 做晚饭
76.do the laundry 做洗衣服的活
77.make the bed 整理床铺
78.iron the shirts 熨烫衬衫
79.sweep the floor 扫地
80.explore dangerous places 探测危险的地方
81.own a robot 拥有机器人
82.change one's life a lot 改变某人的生活许多
83.buy … from … 从…… 买……
84.sell … to … 把……卖给……
85.do housework 做家务活
86.do homework 做家庭作业
87.stay in bed 呆在床上
88.return home from work /school 下班回家/ 放学回家
89.be happy / pleased / satisfied with 对……满意
90.be ready for sth. 为……做好了准备
91.be ready to do sth. 为做某事做好了准备
92.get ready for sth. 为……做准备
93.get ready to do sth. 为做某事做准备
94.go wrong 出毛病， 走错路
95.catch a virus 染上病毒
96.cause a lot of problems 引起许多麻烦
97.wake sb. up 叫醒某人
98.wake up 醒来
99.knock sth. over 碰翻
100.knock on /at sth. 敲（门……）
101.do with（what） 处理 ，对付
102.deal with （how） 处理，对付
103.return sth. to sb. = give back sth. to sb .把……还给……
104.return to sp.=go / come back to sp. 回到某地
105.fall to the ground 掉到地上
106.eat sth. for sb. 替某人吃某物
107.make a mess 搞成一团糟
108.throw sth. into sp.along with sth. 把……和……一道扔进……里
109.use sth. to do sth. 用……做某事
110.keep my flat as clean as new 保持我的公寓和新的一样干净
111.pay for 支付
112.That sounds good. 那听起来很好。
113.get tired = be tired 疲惫
114.last for= go on for 持续 ……
115.sth. needs doing/ to be done 某事需要被做
116.expect to do sth. 期盼做某事
117.expect sb. to do sth. 期盼某人做某事
118.expect that 从句 期盼……
119.get sth. back = have sth. back 取回，拿回
120.You are welcome to do sth. 欢迎你做某事
121.reply to 回复，答复
122.look forward to doing sth. 盼望做某事
123.hear from sb. =get a letter from sb.
=receive a letter from sb. 收到某人来信
124.clear up sth. 清理 , 整理
九年级英语上册教案【篇5】
UNIT1:
词组，短语
1， it is nice of you to do sth
2， bring me the newspaper
3， have lots to eat
4， worry about (not)dong sth
5， be familiar with
6， the 12 animals signs of the Chinese horoscope
7， people in the west
8， learn more about western culture
9， be divided into
10, people born under the same star
11,at times
12,like to be the leader
13,give up easily
14,take care of others
15save money
16,buy sb sth/ buy sth for sb
17,worry too much
18,pay attention to details
19,argue with others
20,love peace
21,keep secrets
22,forgive sb for one’s faults
23,have a good sence of humour
24,travel to different places
25,make and plan things
26,wait without getting angry
27,agree with each other
28,care only about oneself
29,treat everyone equally
30,feel sure about one’s ability
31,spend time /money doing sth
32,explain things to sb
33,show off
34,make such a mess
35,give each of us two gifts
36,the whole birthday cake
37,organize this party for us
38,be patient enough to do sth
39,be on the phone
40,have success at school or work
41,around the middle of the month
42,call Mr zhang on 84166488
43,have a mixture of good luck and bad luck
44,spend money wisely
45,have problems with my bike
46,get lots of rest
47,get sick
48,the same as
49,be suitable for
50,come up with=think of
51,be able to=can
52,have fun in doing sth
53,recommend sb as the new chairperson
54,try to be funny
55,finish all the summer homework
56,get full/good marks
57,forget to do sth
58,be afaid of doing sth
59,make a speech in assembly
60,show sb how to use the libriary
61,try one’s best
62,do extra work
63,get more organized
64,use sth to do
九年级英语上册教案【篇6】
教学目标：
知识与技能
1.Words and phrases: stomachache, cold, headache, fever,
fall off, fell off.
2.Sentences: Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.
So today he’s got a stomachache.
3.Grammar: Talking about illnesses.
教学重点：
Words and phrases: stomachache, cold, headache, fever,
fall off, fell off.
教学难点：
Sentences: Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.
So today he’s got a stomachache.
Grammar: Talking about illnesses.
教学方法：
讲授、过去时
教学过程：
(一)导入：Step 1 Warm-up
T: Hi, boys and girls.
T: Let’s sing a song, ok?
Ss: Ok.
T: Ok! London Bridge is falling down…。 (Ss sing the song)
T: You are clever boys and girls. Now let’s have a Free Talk “What I did yesterday”， Ok?
Ss introduce what they did yesterday
(二)探究新知Step 2 Presentation and leading
T: Who can tell me what happen to Daming in last Unit.
Ss: Daming’s head was bumped.
T: Let’s play this story, ok?
Ss: Ok.
(Two students play in roles of “Daming” and “Sam”， others describe the story, the two students do the actions)
The teacher writes the word “today” on the blackboard. What happened to Daming, Sam, Amy and Lingling? Lead the students to use “to” and “and” to connect the two sentences.
Step 3 Text Teaching
T: Now, this class we are going to learn Module 10 Unit 2 Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits .First, listen to the tape and underline the new words.
(Teach the new words’ cards)
T: Now listen to the tape and repeat it. Are you clear?
(The teacher writes these sentences on the blackboard)
Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.
So today he’s got a stomachache.
T: Now listen to the tape again and tell me what happened to Sam, Lingling, Amy and Lingling.
T: Look at these words: had, ate
(三)巩固新知Step 4 Task-Fulfilling
T: Let’s play a game, ok? Ss: Ok.
T: Let’s play “I do you say”。 I’ll ask four students to come to the front of the class, one student performs Daming eating chocolate biscuits and then having a stomachache, and others describe it, and so on.
Step 5 Text Learning
T: Look at Part 4, answer these questions:
What is wrong with Little Tommy?
What’s wrong with Little Lingling?
What’s wrong with Little Ben?
T: Listen to the tape and repeat it.
T: Let’s read the poem together and do the actions, ok?
Ss: Ok.
(四)作业布置Homework
(五)小结：过去时的用法
板书设计：
Unit 2 Sam had lots of chocolate
Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.
So today he’s got a stomachache.
四年级英语教案范文二：过去式
教学目标：
知识目标
A、能听、 说 、读、写并正确使用单词
“happen, ride, thirsty, watermelon, carry, bump，
fell/fall off, went/go, bought/buy ”。
B、能理解并灵活掌握句型
We went for a bike ride/were hungry and thirsty/bought a watermelon/fell off/carried…. 。
能力目标
在知识目标的基础上，要求学生在实际生活中运用动词过去时态句型We went for a bike ride/were hungry and thirsty/bought a watermelon/fell off/carried….来谈论或描述过去发生的事情，同时在课文的教学中培养学生的阅读能力，从而提高他们的综合语言运用能力
情感目标
让学生通过运用语言来完成学习任务，感受成功，从而引发和培养学生学习英语的内在动机，最终使他们形成英语学习的积极态度。
教学重点：
能理解并灵活使用句型We went for a bike ride/were hungry and thirsty/bought a watermelon/fell off/carried…. ，掌握过去时态的表达方式。
教学难点：
过去时态的运用及利用教师设计的各种阅读训练活动，通过输入和输出的方式，使得学生感知并理解教学内容，并以此话题展开“说”与“写”的训练，培养学生的综合运用语言的技能。
教学过程：
一、Warm up
1.Greetings.
T:Hello,boys and girls.
Ss:Hello,Ms Wang.
T: How are you?
Ss: Fine ,thank you ! And you ?
T: I’m fine , too. Thank you !
2. Sing a song.
T: Let’s sing a song. 《We walked and walked》Ok?
Ss: Ok!
3. Free talk.
T: I went to the supermarket. And I bought some apples, bananas and a big watermelon.(Teacher shows pictures and new words.)Who can introduce : What did you do yesterday?( Teacher shows the questions.)
师生互相问候、听唱歌曲，营造活跃轻松的学习氛围。由于歌曲和所做动作在内容上有一定的联系，所以学生在边唱边跳中很自然地进入一种语言状态，同时也为以下的学习做了铺垫。
师生自由对话，创设宽松的学习氛围，这样既复习了旧知，又让学生感知新知，为学习新内容打下基础，从而使知识连成线，织成网，滚成球。
二、Presentation
活动1)
巧设情景，引入新课。
1.(师事先与一位学生S1共同创设情景：在老师与学生Free talk时，突然S1坐在座位不小心摔倒了，这时老师与他进行对话并通过表情动作)
T:“What happened to you ?
Ss: I fell off my chair.
T: Oh,it is an accident.(教学)
2.(同时，借助多媒体展示Sam 从自行车上摔倒的图片)
引出课题T: Today we’ll learn Module10 Accidents Unit 1“Sam fell off his bike.”
(Ss read the sentence.)
3.提出任务：教师告诉学生通过本节课的学习过后，同学们来谈论偶发事件，小组合作自编自演故事。
从创设情景引出课文的情景，从而引出课题，学生很自然地理解课题。
使学生带着任务有目的的学习，并激发学习兴趣。
活动2)
三、自主探索，学习课文。
1.首先出现Sam和Daming 两个人物的头饰，T告诉学生：Let’s listen and find the answer “what did Sam and Daming go yesterday?”
Listen and point,then choose the right answer.
A.went for a bike ride
B.went to school
引出went for a bike ride 的教学。(手势及动作)
T:What is the difference between these sentences?
A.Yesterday I went to a park.
B.I go to school by bike every day.
Ss:( 找出不同点)
(分小组进行操练)
2.Listen ,point and repeat,then answer“Why did Sam fell off his bike?”
1)Listen and repeat.
2) Discuss in groups then answer.
3)学生回答中引出新词的教学：carried, bumped, hungry, thirsty, bought, watermelon, fell off方法同“went”的教学。(运用肢体语言及图片展示进行教学，Drill line by line)
4)Drill the sentences row by row.
3.最后，再次听音跟读的情况下围绕“What happened to Daming?的问题引导学生小组分角色复述课文的主要内容。(强调先后顺序，并用“then….,and then…..进行复述。)
在学习故事的过程中，让学生说一说其中的人物情节安徽教师招考网()既帮助其理解故事，更主要的是能使学生体会英语故事的丰富多彩，这是阅读教学兴趣培养的补充环节。
培养学生积极交流新知的能力,培养学生自主发现、总结规律的能力
Read the dialogues according to the pictures . Then play a guessing game “Which picture is missing?
培养学生的独立认读能力并在游戏中进一步巩固新知。
活动3)
Play a memory game(利用多媒体呈现所学过的动词及其过去式，一分钟后，点击一部分词的原形或过去式不见了，让小组比赛抢答。
将游戏与练习有机结合，融为一体，让学生边做游戏边练习，寓教于乐，极大地激发了学生的学习兴趣。
活动4)
AB Ex3看图填动词的过去式，并小组分角色表演这意外事件。比比哪组表演得好。
在听说读的基础上，进一步落实写的目标。培养学生的书面表达能力。
四、Production:
Tell interesting stories.(practice in group)
Eg: Yesterday, Tom went for a bike ride with his friends. He___________. Then he________, and then he __________,and then he________.......(went,bought,carried,bumped,fell off,was,walked…)
So he was _______(happy,sad悲伤的，hungry,thirsty,excitied兴奋地….)
1. Practise in groups.
2. Tell and act it out.
即培养了合作交流的意识，且开拓思维，借此练习动词过去式的句型。
五、Homework
1、抄写课文P46 M10U1的单词两遍。
(1)分角色朗读对话。
(2)分角色表演对话。
四年级英语教案范文三：过去的动作
目标与重难点;
教学目标：
1、能够运用Did Dad cook lunch?这类语句询问他人过去的动作，并用Yes,he did./No, he didn’t.来回答。
2、学习并学会运用词汇phone。
3、学习一首歌谣，这项内容不作要求，让学生根据自己的情况选择学习与掌握。
二、教学重点：
能够运用Did Dad cook lunch?这类语句询问他人过去的动作，并用Yes,he did./No, he didn’t.来回答。
教学过程：
一、1、复习动词的过去式，教师把一些动词及其过去式写在黑板上，让学生连线。如cook, play,walk,watch,phone 和它们的过去式cooked, played,walked,watched,phoned ,其中只有phone-- phoned这个词学生没学，当他们把其他词对应起来之后，很容易地就掌握了phoned这个过去式。
2、练习，如引导学生依次说出下列内容：phone—phoned—phoned Grandma—Mum phoned Grandma—Yesterday,Mum phoned Grandma.
二、学习课文。
1教师用多媒体展示课文中的图片或让学生直接观察课文插图，通过仔细观察回答老师的问题：Did Dad cook lunch? 并且指导学生用Yes,he did.做回答。
2.听录音，学生讨论回答活动2中的问题。
3、再听录音，跟读课文。
4、在熟读课文的基础上让学生描述课文内容。
三、韵句学习：
1、学生自己读韵句，找出自己不会读的单词。
2、教师领读韵句内容。
3、听录音跟读。
4、学生边说韵句边表演出韵句内容。
四、课本，活动4.
Play the game: Last wekend.
六、 总结评价
1、这节课我的表现：A 优秀 B 良好 C不是很好，我要继续努力。
2、下列句子我会读。用“∨”标出会读的句子。
(1)Yesterday,Mr Smart cooked noodles for lunch.
(2)Tom helped him.
(3)Mum phoned Grandma.
(4)Sam and Amy watched TV.
(5)Did Dad cook lunch? Yes,he did./No, he didn’t
七、Homework:
认真听课文录音并跟读三遍。
九年级英语上册教案【篇7】
hear from sb.=receive/ get a letter from sb.
work well in doing sth.做某事方面很有功效
be short of 缺乏……
one of the greatest problems 最大问题之一
1.We got lost and couldn’t find each other. 我们走失了，互相找不到对方。
2.It seems that their living conditions were not very good. 似乎他们的生活条件不是很好。
3.It is possible that Kangkang’s father was the only child in his family.
康康的父亲有可能是他家中的独生子。
4.One answer is known as the one-child policy. 其中一项众所周知的措施是独生子女政策.
5.And even though we have made a lot of progress, we have big pollution problems in the
city. 虽然我们已经取得了很大的进步，但是仍存在严重的城市污染问题。
already “已经”（多用于肯定陈述句）。
如：He has already gone home. 他已经回家了。
yet “已经; 还”（用于否定句或疑问句）。
如：Have you found him yet? 你已经找到他了吗？
I haven’t finished my homework yet. 我还没完成作业。
※ already 也可用于疑问句，表“出乎意料或惊奇”
Have you finished your homework already? 难道你已经完成作业了？
ever “曾经”（多用于疑问句，问初次经历）。
如：I have ever been abroad. 我曾出过国。
never“从未；从来不”（多用于否定陈述句），常回答ever的句型。
如：I have never seen him before.
----Has he ever been abroad? 他曾出过国吗？
----No, never. 不，从来不。
just “刚刚”（多用于肯定句，位于谓语动词之前）。
如： I have just tried to call you. 我刚刚打电话给你。
before “之前”（一般位于句末；常与never呼应）。
如：He says he has never seen such beautiful scenery before.
1.---- I really hate to go shopping. 我真讨厌去购物。
---- So do I . 我也是。
So do I .为倒装句，表示前面提到的肯定情况也同样适合另外一个主体，表“某某也一样”，结构为“so + be /情态动词/ 助动词 + 主语”。
如：Jim is a student, so is Tom. 吉姆是一名学生，汤姆也是。
Jim can swim, so can Tom. 吉姆会游泳，汤姆也会。
Jim likes sports, so does Tom. 吉姆喜欢运动，汤姆也喜欢。
如表前面不怎样，后面“也不”怎样时，其结构为“ neither/ nor + be /情态动词/ 助动词 + 主语”。
如：Jim wasn’t Chinese, neither/ nor were they. 吉姆不中国人，他们也不是。
Jim can’t speak Japanese, neither can I . 吉姆不会说日语，我也不会。
Jim didn’t go there, neither did I . 吉姆没去那儿，我也没去。
如前后两句表达的是同一个主体，则不能倒装，表“的确如此”。
如：Jim is a good student. So he is. 吉姆是一名好学生，的确如此。
Jim swims well. So he does. 吉姆游泳很好，的确如此。
2.At that time, China was the country with the largest population in the world.
那时，中国是世界上人口最多的国家。
population为不可数名词，表示人口的多少只能用 “large”或 “small”修饰，提问人口用“what”.
如：The population of Shanghai is larger than that of Beijing. 上海的人口比北京多。
What’s the population of China?= How many people are there in China?
中国的人口有多少？
3. Great changes have taken place in China. 中国发生了巨大变化。
take place 指必然性的“发生”或有计划、安排之内的“举行”。
如：The meeting will take place next Friday. 会议将在下周五举行。
happen 指偶然的、没有预料的“发生“，其结果往往给人带来不幸或麻烦。
如：The accident happened yesterday. 事故发生在昨天。
※两者都不用于被动语态。
如：The population has increased a lot. 人口增长发很多。
4.increase 可作及物动词也可作不及物动词。其含义是“增长，增加，加强”等。
increase by… 指“增加了……”; increase to…指 “增加到……”
5. and about one fifth of the people in the world live in China.
而且世界上大约五分之一的人口生活在中国。
one fifth 是分数表达法。英文分数表达法：分子为基数词，分母为序数词，先读分子后读分母。当分子大于1时，分母的序数词则变为复数，直接在词尾加“s”。
如：one fourth四分之一three fourths 四分之三one second二分之一two thirds三分之二
6.It has worked well in controlling China’s population.
它在控制人口数量方面取得了显著的功效。
work well in doing sth. 表“在……方面很有功效”, 如:
如：Doing eye exercises works well in protecting our eyesight.
做眼保健操在保护视力方面很有功效。
7. Because of our large population, we are short of energy and water.
be short of… 表 “缺乏……”
如:She is always short of money at the end of every month. 每个月底她总是缺钱。
be short for… 表“是……的缩写”.
如:TV is short for television. TV是television的缩写形式.
8. Can all Chinese families offer their children a good education?
所有的中国家庭都能给他们的的孩子提供良好的教育吗？
offer 表“（主动）给予， 提供”
offer sb. sth. “提供某人某物”.
如：I offered him a glass of wine. 我敬了他一杯酒。
offer to do sth. “（主动）提出做某事”
如：She offered to cook for her mother. 她提出帮她妈妈煮饭。
I can’t go shopping in big stores unless I travel for a couple of hours.
我得花几个小时，才能到大的商场购物。
9. unless = if not 表“除非…; 如果不”，引导条件状语从句。
如：I won’t go unless I hear from you. = I won’t go if I don’t hear from you.
如果你不通知我，我就不去。
Unless Bill studies hard, he’ll fail in the exam. 如果比尔不努力, 他不会通过考试的.
10. a couple of… 表 “几个人或几件事”.
如:a couple of years ago 几年前; a couple of students 几个学生
如: a couple of watches 两只手表； five couples of cats 五对猫
11.pair 指两件不可分开使用的东西,它们可指两件互不相连的东西(鞋子、袜子等)，也可指
两部分构成的一件东西（裤子、剪刀等）。
如：a pair of shoes 一双鞋子a pair of pants 一条裤子
( )1.-They have been to Australia.
-So _____ I.
A. do B. have been C. did D. have
分析：D 此句为so引导的完全倒装句。其含义为“A如此，B也如此。”其结构是so+be/助动词/情态动词+主语。本句为完成时态，其助动词是have。故选D。
( )2.The population of Shanghai is larger than _____ of Shenyang.
分析：A 此句要用相同成分即上海的人口和沈阳的人口做比较。因为population是不可数名词，所以用that代替。如果是复数名词则要用those来代替。
( )3.-_____ the population of the U.S.A. in ?
-It _____ about 296 million.
C. How many is; was D. How many was; is
分析：B 问人口的多少用what而不用how many。本题问的是的人口， 故为过去时态。
( )4._____ of the teachers are women in our school.
A. Two third B. Two threes C. Two thirds D. Second three
分析：C分数的表达法是基数词在前表示分子，序数词在后表示分母；当分子大于1时，表示分母的序数词要加s。
( )5.He’s read this book before, _____?
A. hasn’t he B. doesn’t he C .isn’t he D. wasn’t he
分析：A 本题考查反义疑问句反问部分的时态与人称的单复数要与陈述部分一致的用法。
( )6.The _____ population may be the greatest challenge of the world today.
A. increase B. increased C. increasing D. increases
分析：C 本题考查increase的现在分词作定语的情况，表示“正在增长的”。increased是它的过去分词也可作定语，但表示的是“已增长过的”。
( )7.The little girl has _____ finished reading the book you lent her.
A .already B. yet C. still D. once
分析：A already“已经”，常用覨t now.
分析：C 上句为否定情况，应用neither/nor+助动词+主语，表示“我也未参观过造纸厂”。
1. ---No one likes “Little Emperors.” ---N___________ do my parents.
2. The cars in the cities are i____________ rapidly these days, so traffic jam comes into being.
3. People couldn’t live long because of poor medical t________________.
4. In China, some people in less developed areas p__________ boys to girls.DA被动语态。根据题中changes是复数，答句用完成时态。故选B。
( )9.Students today have a lot of pressure(压力) _____ they have to learn too much knowledge at school.
A. in order to B .unless C. because D .because of
分析：C in order to和because of后面不能接从句，unless不符合题意。故选C，用because。
( )10.-I have never visited a paper factory.
A. So have I. B. So I have. C. Neither have I. D.I haven’t now.
分析：C 上句为否定情况，应用neither/nor+助动词+主语，表示“我也未参观过造纸厂”。
1. ---No one likes “Little Emperors.” ---N___________ do my parents.
2. The cars in the cities are i____________ rapidly these days, so traffic jam comes into being.
3. People couldn’t live long because of poor medical t________________.
4. In China, some people in less developed areas p__________ boys to girls.
5. His mother told him that the sun r__________ in the east and sets in the west.
1.We must ___________ ___________ (采取措施) to control the population.
2. Doing eye exercises ____________ __________ (起明显作用) in protecting our eyesight.
3. In 1960s, we were ________ _________ (缺乏) food and money .
4. He wouldn’t leave the TV set, __________ ___________ (既使) he was going to have an important exam the next day.
5.Her daughter __________ __________ (迷路) in the shopping center yesterday.
1.中国人口有多少？ 中国有大约13亿人口。
_______ the _________ _______ China ? China ______ a population of ______1.3 billion.
2. 为什么中国要实施独生子女政策？ 虽然跟以前比，中国人口增长放慢了，但人口问题依然严峻。
---Why does China _________ __________ with its __________ policy ?
---___________ its population is __________ _________ slowly than before, its population problem _________ ___________ quite ___________.
3. 这所学校里老师的数量是300人，其中四分之一是女教师。
_________ ___________ of the teachers in the school __________ 300, _________ ___________ of them ___________ women teachers.
4. 上周石油的价格增长了百分之二。 的确如些。
The price of oil ___________ ___________ 2% last week.
__________ _________ _____________.
5. 你生活在哪种家庭，是大家庭，还是小家庭？
_________ _________ of family are you ________, ________ family or _______ family ?
( ) 1. Two thirds of the surface of the earth ____ covered with water.
( ) 2. The number of workers in this factory _____ increasing.
( ) 3. ---It seems to me that you are very hard-working, Maria.
---I have to. I have a lot of _____ from my family and society.
A. time B. efforts C. pressure
( ) 4. ---______ have you done with the waste ?
---I have thrown it away.
( ) 5. ---Which country has a ____ population, England or Germany ?
( ) 6. About one fifth of the people in the world _____ in China.
A. live B. is living C. has lived
( ) 7. ---Excuse me, is Joan in ?
---Sorry, she isn’t here. She ___ to the airport to see her parents off half an hour ago.
A. went B. has gone C. has been
( ) 8. ---Who will go to the airport to meet Jenny ?
---I will. I _____ her several times. I can find her easily.
A. met B. have met C. will meet
( ) 9. We are tired. We have studies for ____ hours.
A. a couple B. couple C. a couple of
( ) 10. The more excellent our public transportation is, _____ our life will be.
A. the happier B. the more happy C. the more happily
( ) 11. ---What did Jeff say about the lost girl ?
---He said that he had seen her _______.
A. three days agoB. three days before C. for three days
( ) 12. ---Dad, my teacher said I had made a lot of progress recently.
---I’m glad to hear that. But I think you still _______.
A. have a long way to go B. have a rest C. live in the present
( ) 13. ---I went swimming last Sunday.
---_________. I like it very much.
A. So I do B. So I did C. So did I
( ) 14. ---We haven’t been to the Great Wall. ---_________.
A. So has she B. Nor she has C. Neither has she
( ) 15. ---Did you know _______?
---They had a quarrel about the answer to the question.
A. what did they happen B. what happened to them C. what they happened
1. Neither 2. increasing 3. treatment 4.prefer 5. rises
1. take measures 2. works well 3. short of 4. even though 5. got lost
1 What’s the population of, has, about / around
2. carry on, one-child, Though, growing more, still seems , serious
3. The number, is, a quarter, are
5. What kind/ sort / type, in, extended, nuclear
1----5 ABCBA 6----10 AABCA 11----15 BACCB
九年级英语上册教案【篇8】
9A Unit 1 Star Signs
1. It is nice of you to bring me the newspaper. (It’s nice of sb. to do sth. 某人做某事真是太好了，形容词表示人的品质特征时，介词用of)
2. It says I’ll have lots to eat and drink today. (报纸、杂志、牌子、广告等上写着用 says)
3. You shouldn’t worry about not having breakfast. (担心没有早饭吃) (worry about (not) doing sth. 担心（不）做某事，动名词的否定形式是在动名词前面加not)
4. A year is divided into (被分成)12 different star signs.
5. The time of your birthday decides your star sign.
6. People born under the same star sign (出生在同一星座下的人)share similar characteristics.
(be similar to = be the same as 和……相同，与…….相似)
7. take an active part in 积极参加 be impatient with sb. 对某人没有耐心
be patient with sb. 对某人有耐心 give up easily 轻易放弃
be curious about… 对……感到好奇 be kind / friendly / nice to sb. 对某人友好
be confident of sth. 对……有信心/把握 pay attention to details 注重细节
buy your friends nice gifts = buy nice gifts for your friends 给朋友买漂亮的礼物
have lots of energy = energetic 精力充沛 keep secrets 保守秘密
enjoy life 热爱生活 have a good sense of humour 有幽默感
be successful in doing sth. 成功地做某事 dream about everything 梦想一切
8. You love peace(热爱和平) and do not like to argue with others.（和别人争吵）
（ argue with sb. about sth. 因某事和某人争吵）
9. It is silly of you not to forgive others for their faults.
(原谅别人的过失) (forgive sb. for sth. 原谅某人某事)
（动词不定式的否定放在不定式前面 not to do sth.）
10. You are patient enough（enough 修饰形容词放在形容词后面，patient 是形容词，前面要用be动词）to wait without getting angry. （介词后面用动词ing 形式）
11. You hate to be like anyone else（ else修饰特殊疑问词、不定代词，放在它们后面） and try everything just to be different.
12. A fair person treats everyone equally.(平等地对待每个人，一视同仁)
13. A confident person feels sure about his own abilities.
( be / feel sure /certain of / about sth. 对感到自信/ 有把握)
14. make friends with him 和他交朋友 tell jokes 讲笑话
take care of = look after 照顾，照料 share food with others和别人分享食物
15. 反义词： active---inactive, modest---proud, patient---impatient, fair---unfair,
correct---incorrect, polite---impolite, selfish---generous,
16. It is thoughtful of Andy to play his CDs for us. （Andy为我们播放CD，他考虑得真周到）
17. It is typical of Simon to make such a mess. （把事情搞得乱七八糟是Simon的典型特征。）(make a mess 把……搞得乱七八糟)
18. each of us 我们每个人 at all times 一直，始终
travel around the world 周游世界 travel to different places 去不同的地方旅行
pass the football to Peter = pass Peter the football 把足球传给Peter
plan to go out 计划外出 pack one’s bag整理行李
19. Sandy has been on the phone for hours. (Sandy已经打了好几个小时的电话了。)
20. This month（这个月，不用介词） you will have a lot to celebrate.
21. You will have success at school or work(学业有成，事业有成) around the middle of the month.（大约在本月中旬）
22. You will be given some money.
23. For more details, please call Master Zhang on 5556 0678.
（call+人+on + 号码, 表示按….. 号码给……打电话）
24. a mixture of good luck and bad luck （好运和厄运的混合体）
25. go to a party 去参加聚会 have problems with my health 健康有问题
be suitable for the post 适合这个职位 run for the post 竞争这个职位
26. I don’t think he would be able to(=can) organize things well.
27. He is imaginative enough to come up with new ideas. 他富有充分的想象力来产生一些新的观点。(imaginative是形容词，前面要用be 动词，enough放在形容词之后)
(come up with =think of 想出)
28. Who else would be suitable (for the post)? 还有谁合适（这个职位）呢？
29. recommend David for the post / job 推荐David 担任这个职位/做这项工作(for +职位)
recommend David as the new chairperson of the Students’ Union
推荐David 当学生会的新任主席（as+人，既指职位也指人）
recommend a good dictionary to me (recommend sth. to sb. 向某人推荐某物)
recommend us to read this book (recommend sb. to do sth. 推荐某人做某事)
30. He is a Gemini. = His star sign is Gemini. 他是双子座。
31. The only thing is that David has much more hair than my uncle.
32. We think he will be an excellent chairperson because he has many good personal qualities.
33. He thinks he can do anything if he tries his best.
34. He is never afraid of making a speech（发言） in assembly（在晨会上）.
(be afraid of doing sth. 害怕做某事) （他在晨会上发言从未害怕过/ 拘束过）
35. He will / would not mind doing extra work for the Students’ Union.
（不介意为学生会做额外的工作）（mind doing sth. 介意做某事）
36. He always gets good marks in tests. ( 在测试中成绩一直名列前茅)
37. He even got full marks(得满分) once in an English test.
38. He never forgets to do the things he needs to do. （从不忘记去做他需要做的事）
39. He has joined the Computer Club（参加电脑俱乐部） this year because he wants to learn to use the computer to help himself get more organized.（帮助自己工作起来更有效率）
40. We think that David has all the qualities to be a good chairperson.(具备了一个优秀学生会 主席应该具备的各项素质)
41. We hope that you agree with us.
42. ---It was kind of you to recommend me as the new chairperson.
= Thank you for recommending me as the new chairperson. (谢谢你们推荐我当新任主席)
---It’s our pleasure. = Not at all. = You are welcome. 不用谢。
43. You are the most suitable person.
44. Mr Wu spends a lot of time explaining things to us.
(spend ….doing sth.花时间做某事) （explain sth. to sb. 向某人解释某事）
45. Daniel is very clever, but he never shows off.(买弄，炫耀)
九年级英语上册教案【篇9】
I. 重点词组
1. get lost 迷路
2. each other 彼此
3.at least 至少
4take place发生
5because of 因为
6.be strict with sb. 对某人严格要求
7.carry out 实行
8.be short of 缺乏
9.take measures to do sth.采取措施做某事
10.be known as… 作为……而著名
well in doing…在……方面起作用
12.a couple of 一些
13keep up with赶上,跟上
II.重点句型
1. Have you found him yet? 你已经找到他了吗?
2. ——I really hate to go shopping. 我的确讨厌购物。——So do I.我也如此。
3. But it seems that their living conditions were not very good.但是似乎他们的生活条件不太好。
4. But great changes have already taken place in China recently.但是近来中国已发生了巨大的变化。
5. Because of the one-child policy, now most families have only one child.
由于我国独生子女政策的实行，现在大部分家庭只有一个孩子。
6. What’s the population of the U.S.A.?美国的人口是多少?
7. ——What’s more, the population in developing countries is growing faster. ——So it is.
而且，发展中国家的人口在更快地发展。 的确如此。
8. Our government has taken many measures to control the population.
我们的政府已采取了许多控制人口的措施。
III.语法：
常用于现在完成时的时间状语：already, just , yet, ever, never, recently.
e.g. 1. I have just called you.
2. ——Have you ever been to France? ——No, I’ve never been to any European countries.
3. ——Have you seen him yet? ——Yes, I have seen him already.
九年级英语上册教案【篇10】
Module3 unit2 language
Welcome
1. in a broad sense从广义上讲
2. transmit information传播信息
3. various forms of language语言的各种形式
4. stand for a beaming smile代表灿烂的微笑
5. all over the world/ throughout the world全世界
6. fly in circles 绕圈飞行
7. inform sb of/ about sth.通知某人某事
keep sb informed of sth使某人被通知
8. including sth/ sth included包括某事
9. share sth with sb与某人分享某物
10. make a special Internet language构成一种特殊的因特网语言
11. have some effective methods for studying the English language
有一些学习英语的特殊方法
Reading
1. throughout history贯穿历史；throughout the world/ all over the world
2. be made up of/consist of由…组成
3. a language with some confusing rules 一种带有令人迷惑规则的语言
4. bring sth with sb to sp将某物待在身边带到某地
5. at the end of the 9th Century 在九世纪晚期
6. a language called Celtic一种叫做凯尔特的语言
7. be different from与……不同
8. It’s certain that… …是确定的
9. the official language of England英国官方语
10. sb find it hard to do sth觉得做某事很难
11. This is because…/ That is why…表语从句句型
12. have similar meaning in …有类似的意思
13. contribute to / result in/ lead to/cause the development of……导致……的发展
14. sb take control of控制
15. sb lose control of失去控制
16. be replaced by/ with；设备sb take the place of sb 被…代替
17. despite the fact/ in spite of the fact尽管事实如此
18. have an impact on(the English language)对…巨大冲击
19. at this point在此期间
20. raise animals 饲养动物
21. the upper/lower class上(下)层阶级
22. common people普通人（地位相对低的）
23. by the latter half of the 24th century到24世纪下半叶
24. be adopted by被…采用
25. one’s mother tongue/ one’s native language母语
26. undergo huge changes(underwent, undergone)经历巨大变化/ undergo treatment接受治疗
27. continue doing/ continue to do sth继续做某事
28. a sequence of events一系列事件
29. relate… to…与…相关
30. official occasions官方正式场合
31. modern English/life/science and technology现代英语/生活/科技
32. make a promise; keep /break one’s promise做许诺；遵守诺言/食言
33. promise to do sth许诺做某事
34. a promising boy一个有前途的男孩
35. disagree with what =everything that =all that sb say
1.The English language is made up of/consists of the rules and vocabulary each group of people brought to Britain with them.
英语是由每个进入不列颠的人群所说语言中的规则和词汇构成的。
2.They brought with them their languages, which also mixed with Anglo-Saxon.
他们带来了自己的语言，与盎格鲁萨克森语混合起来
3.The language they created is what we now call Old English.
他们创造的语言就是我们现在所说的古英语。
4.Middle English is the name given to the English used from around the 12th to the 16th century.中古英语这个名词是指大约12世纪至16世纪期间所使用的英语
5.However, the Norman conquest did not have the same result that the Germanic invasion had had about 600 years earlier.
然而，诺曼征服并没有给英语带来大约6前日耳曼入侵所带来的相同后果。
6.The question of English will continue changing in the future is easy to answer.
英语在未来是否会继续变化这个问题其实很容易回答
7.Where a person comes from will affect their style of speech.
一个人来自哪里会影响他们说话的风格
8.There are many different dialects of English depending on where people live.
根据人们居住的地方（的不同）有许多不同英语方言。
9. We sometimes find it hard to decide which words or phrases to use
我们有时发现很难决定用何词和短语。
10.This is where I disagree.
This is what I disagree to.这就是我不赞同的地方。
Word power & Grammar & Task
1. spoken English/written English口语、书面语
2. a large amount of / a great deal of+不可数n
3. a large number of/ a great(good) many+可数n复
4. a large quantity of/plenty of+可数/不可数n
5. sort out=arrange安排
6. discard=throw away丢弃
7. I regret to inform you我遗憾地通知你
8. in addition=plus除此之外
9. have a word with=speak to与某人谈话
10. have words with sb与某人吵架
11. take sth into consideration考虑某事
12. five permanent members of the UN Security Council五个联合国安理会常任理事国
13. take action/measures to do sth采取行动做某事
14. set high standards for设一个标准
15. below standard在标准以下
16. up to the required standard超过被要求的标准
17. make a decision做决定
18. at one time曾经（at times 有时候）
19. at a time一次
20. keep … pure使…纯化
21. due to/because of/thanks to/ as a result of/owing to由于
22. ban sb from doing sth阻止某人做某事
23. easily accessed television programs容易接受的电视节目have access to
24. get along/on with sb与某人相处
25. There is no need to do sth没有必要做某事
26. waste time doing sth浪费时间做某事
27. It’s a waste of time to do/doing sth
28. shorten the distance缩短距离
29. embarrass sb into doing sth做某事使某人尴尬
30. refuse to accept an idea拒绝接受一个主意
31. from across the world从全世界
32. adopt one’s suggestion/a new teaching method
采纳某人的建议/一种新的教学方法
project
1. A differ greatly from B in size and shape
A与B 在尺寸及形状方面大大不同
2. the very first Chinese characters真正第一批简体中文
3. change over time随着时间改变
4. as a whole作为整体
5. on the whole（常用于句首）
6. combine two or more elements together把两种及更多种元素结合起来
7. the symbol for a man代表人类
8. be the opposite of sth是…的相反
9. Opposite our school are two shops.（倒装句）
10. Opposite our school is a shop.
11. be highly complex非常复杂
12. reflect one’s thought反应某人的思想
13. simplified Chinese characters简体中文
14. be widely used in mainland China在中国大陆广泛使用
15. The way a written language developed can tell us just as much about a culture as the history of a spoken language.书面语发展方式表示出来的文化就像口语的历史表示出来的文化一样。
16. The Chinese language differs from many Western languages in that it uses characters which have meanings and can stand alone as words.
汉语和许多西方语言不同，区别在于汉语使用本身就有意义，可以独立成字的汉字。
17. Not all characters are used to describe objects.=
All characters are not used to describe objects.=并非所有汉字都用来描述事物的。
九年级英语上册教案【篇11】
2. pour… into… 把……排放到……
5. do harm to … / be harmful to… 对……有害
1. Look, there are several chemical factories pouring waste water into the streams.
看, 有几家化工厂正往河里排放废水.
2. Everything has changed.一切已发生了变化.
3. How long have you been like this? 你像这样多长时间了?
4. I’m always in a bad mood because I can’t stand the environment here.
我的情绪总是很差因为我受不了这里的环境.
5. However, not all people know that noise is also a kind of pollution and is harmful to humans’ health.
然而,并非所有的人都知道噪音也是一种污染, 而且有害于人类健康.
1. Granny said, “I’m feeling even worse.”
Granny said that she was feeling even worse.
2. “ Do you still want to live here, Granny?” the journalist asked.
The journalist asked Granny if she still wanted to live there.
3. “ How is the environment around this place?” the journalist asked.
The journalist asked how the environment around that place was.
九年级英语上册教案【篇12】
一、学习目标：
知识目标：能正确使用Mdule 12中的单词和短语；
能力目标：能表述某一课程的情况；正确掌握主谓一致。
情感目标：通过了解其他国家暑期培训班、夏令营等相关信息，拓展视野。
二、重点、难点：
重点：
1. 应用本模块交际用语，如：Welce t…; Please give a ” I std up and englishcurse-suer.c.
试题答案
一、1. A 2. B 3. C
4. A 解析：the rest在此处指“其余的钱”，ne为不可数名词，因此the rest所指为单数意义，谓语动词要用单数。此外，“give sth. t sb.”的`被动形式为“sth. be given t sb.”，故选A。
5. B 6. D 7. B 8. C
9. D 解析：该题考查主谓一致。由nt nl…but als连接两个并列主语，其谓语动词的单复数形式同与其最靠近的主语保持一致，故谓语动词应用单数形式。又据句意“他们都还没有回来”，可知用has gne而不用has been。
10. A 解析：该题考查主谓一致。neither…nr是一组连词，可连接两个并列主语，其谓语动词应同最靠近它的主语I保持一致，因此选A。
11. A 解析：该题考查主谓一致。这个句子的主语是a nuber f deer，是一个复数概念，因此谓语动词应用复数形式。（deer的单复数同形）
12. B
13. D 解析：“分数或百分数＋f＋名词”构成的短语作主语时，其谓语动词的单复数形式要由f后的名词而定。One third f the是指“三分之一的学生”，f后的the是指学生，为可数名词的复数，故谓语动词要用复数。
14. B
15. C 解析：此句意为“当我来访时，他们全家人正在吃晚饭”，fail是指家里的每一个人，故谓语动词要用复数。
二、1~5 DABCD 6~10 AAABD
三、(A) CDADB (B) ABDBC
四、1. sunglasses 2. curse 3. bed 4. rest 5. prgress 6. experienced
7. Mer 8. relatinships 9. applicatin 10. activities
五、1. have taen place 2 give a 5
九年级英语上册教案【篇13】
Unit 4 What would you do?
Part 1: Teaching design (第一部分：教学设计)
Structures: Second conditional, Should for advice
Target language:
What would you do if you won a million dollars?
I’d give it to medical research.
I can’t sleep the night before an exam. What should I do?
If I were you, I’d take a long walk before going to bed.
Vocabulary: million, charity, pimple, confident, shirt, tie, medical research
Learning strategies: Matching, Listening for key words
SECTION A
Goals
●To learn to use Second conditional and Should for advice
●To listen and talk about imagined life
Procedures
Warming up by learning about Second conditional and Should for advice
The second conditional (also called conditional type 2) is a structure used for talking about unreal situations in the present or in the future. This page will explain how the second conditional is formed, and when to use it.
The structure of a second conditional sentence
Like a first conditional, a second conditional sentence consists of two clauses, an “if” clause and a main clause:
if clause main clause
If I had a million dollars, I would buy a big house.
If the “if” clause comes first, a comma is usually used. If the “if” clause comes second, there is no need for a comma:
main clause if clause
I would buy a big house if I had a million dollars.
We use different verb forms in each part of a second conditional:
if clause if + subject + simple past verb*
main clause subject + would + verb
1a Talking about imaginary situations
What would you do if you had a lot of money?
If I had a lot of money, I would give it to charity.
If I had a lot of money, I would buy snacks.
If I had a lot of money, I would give it to Hope Project.
If I had a lot of money, I would buy books for the poor.
1b Listening and numbering
Now you are going to listen and number the pictures 1 to 3 in the order you hear them.
Tapescript
Girl1: Hey, did you see this newspaper article? An old man had a million dollars. And he gave it to charity.
Boy1: Wow, what a nice man!
Girl1: What would you do if you had a million dollars?
Boy1: If I had a million dollars, I’d give the money to the zoo. I want to help the pandas.
Girl1: That’s a gook idea! I know what I’d do. I’d buy a big house for my family.
Girl2: Really? I’d put the money in the bank. Then I’d just watch it grow!
Boy2: Hmmmm… I think I’d give the money to medical research. I’d want to help other people.
Now listen again and write down the sentences with Second conditional and Should for advice
1c Doing pairwork
Let’s pretend that we are the people in the picture on page 26. Talk with your partner about what you would do if you had a million dollars.
Look. This old man had a million dollars, and he gave it to charity.
Wow! What would you do if you won a million dollars?
I’d give it to medical research.
I’d take a chance to achieve my dream of flying to the moon.
If I won a million dollars, I’d stop working and become a professional runner.
I’d go to an old people’s home to help them.
I’d volunteer at the hospital twice every week.
2a Listening and circling
Listen to the tape and circle the reasons in the box on page 27 why Larry is nervous.
Tapescript
Girl1: Where are you going, Larry?
Boy1: To Tom’s party.
Girl1: Lucky you! I’d love to go to that party!
Boy1: Yeah, well, I’m a little nervous. I don’t know what to wear.
Girl1: If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
Boy1: And I don’t have a present. What if everyone brings a present?
Girl1: If I were you, I’d take a small present-a pen or
something. Keep it in your pocket and if everyone has a present,
you can give him yours. If not, you can keep it.
Boy1: OK. But what if I don’t know anyone?
Girl1: If you don’t know anyone, you can talk to Tom. He’ll introduce you to people.
Boy1: I guess I can do that.
Girl1: Look! You’re sure to have fun. But if you’re still nervous, you can leave.
Now listen again and write down all the expressions onto your phrase book.
go to that party, a little nervous, wear a shirt and tie, have a present, bring a present, take a small present, keep…in your pocket, know anyone, talk to…, introduce… to …, have fun
2b Listening and checking
Listen to the tape again and check on page 27 the four things Larry’s sister says to him.
2c Doing pairwork
Xu Linfeng, you are Larry. Men Yating, you are Larry’s sister. Xu is going to talk about his worries and Men is going to give him advice.
X: I don’t know what to wear. M: If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
X: I don’t have a present. What if everyone else brings a present? M: If I were you, I’d take a small present-a pen or something.
X: What if I don’t know anyone? M: If you don’t know anyone, you can talk to Tom. He’ll introduce you to people.
… …
3a Reading and matching
Go to page 28. Read the problems in the boxes and match them with the correct advice.
And now write down all the expressions into your phrase book.
be really shy, enjoy parties, get nervous before big parties, get pimples, look terrible, the night before…, take a big exam, do well, help with…, eat lots of fruits, drink lots of water, take a long walk, go to bed, look friendly, feel shy
3b Thinking and role playing
Next you are going to think of different advice for the problems in activity 3a. Role play conversations with your partner.
A: I am really shy. I don’t enjoy parties. B: If I were you, I’d go and shout in the street. I’d set up parties and invite all my classmates to come and sing and dance.
A: I get nervous before big parties and I get pimples. B: Pimples look good to me. They are not terrible at all. If I were you, the night before the big exam I’d lie in bed counting the cows, the sheep, the cattle and the horses. Then I’d have a nice sleep. If you count as many cows as possible you’d do well in the exam.
A: I can’t lose my weight. B: If I were you, I’d eat lots of fruits, drink lots of water and take a long walk before going to bed every evening.
4. Doing group work
You are put into pairs and find out each other’s problems at school and at home. Then give each other advice.
I really want to go to the mall with my parents, but I don’t have the time. Finish your homework at school and stop going to Sunday classes. You’ll find time that way.
I failed the driver’s exam and cannot get my driver’s license. Go practicing driving more often and go over the textbook three more times. You won’t fail next time.
My father does not want me to get my ears pierced. If I were you, I’d go to my mother for support. Or you can ask your mother to have her ears pierced first.
I have to go to school on foot. I want to take the bus. Going to school on foot is good for your health. Go on going to school, to any places nearby on foot. It save money, too.
I like to choose my own clothes, but my mother doesn’t allow me to do that. Wear your school uniforms while you are still a student. Wait till you are a big man and you’d have the right to choose your own clothes.
… …
Closing down by taking a test on Second conditional
Match up the parts of the sentence
1. If I lost my job,
a) we'd both benefit.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) you'd be more aware of what people really felt.
d) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
2. If I were in your position,
a) I'd resign rather than wait to be sacked.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) you'd be more aware of what people really felt.
d) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
3. If I spoke Japanese as well as you do,
a) I'd resign rather than wait to be sacked.
b) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
c) we'd both benefit.
d) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
4. If we spent more on Research and Development,
a) I'd resign rather than wait to be sacked.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
d) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
5. If you spoke less and listened more,
a) I'd resign rather than wait to be sacked.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
d) you'd be more aware of what people really felt.
6. If you spent more time on your own problems and a bit less on mine,
a) I'd resign rather than wait to be sacked.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) we'd both benefit.
d) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
7. If we controlled our expenses a bit better,
a) I'd resign rather than wait to be sacked.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) we'd save a lot of money.
d) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
8. If you invested some time into learning how the Internet works,
a) you'd find that it could really help you in your job.
b) I'd have a lot of problems getting another one.
c) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
d) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
9. If we opened an office in Tokyo,
a) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
b) you'd be more aware of what people really felt.
c) I'd be interested in working there.
d) we'd both benefit.
10. If you didn't take the job,
a) you'd regret it later.
b) you'd be more aware of what people really felt.
c) we wouldn't be so behind technologically.
d) I'd try to find a job with one of the Japanese banks.
SECTION B
Goals
●To find out about people’s personalities
●To learn to communicate by Second conditional and Should for advice
Procedures
Warming up by learning about personality
What is personality? What is your personality?
In psychology, personality describes the character of emotion, thought, and behavior patterns unique to a person. There are several theoretical perspectives on personality in psychology, which involve different ideas about the relationship between personality and other psychological constructs, as well as different theories about the way personality develops.
1a Describing and filling
Turn to page 29 and fill in the blanks with words given.
1b Which words in activity 1a describe you? Tell your partner.
What are you like? I think I am creative and outgoing.
Words used to describe people
Adventurous, superstitious, dependant (on), unfriendly, aggressive, active, old-fashioned, anxious, adaptable, decent, moral, annoyed, irritated, arrogant, very irritating, enlightened, well-informed, upset, excited, open, open-minded, sincere, honest, crazy, flipped-out, well-balanced, stable, shy, timid, talented, gifted, excited, enthusiastic, crazy, mad, persevering, persistent; dogged, helpful, well-known/famous, crazy, loopy, mad, zany, popular, modest, humble, self-effacing, demented, crazy, possessive, spellbinding, fascinating, silly, ignorant, stupid, spiteful, evil, angry, mean, spiteful, well-behaved, good, chaotic, disorganized, charming, cool, thankful, grateful, dumb, self-centred, ambitious, honest, jealous, selfish, simple, plain, simply, arrogant, smug, vain, unique, matchless, lonely, lonesome, vain, very mean, detestable, disgusting, elegant, classy, touchy, sensitive (to), sensitive, feeling, energetic; assertive, committed, dedicated, narrow-minded, successful
serious, first-class, fair, fantastic, fascinating, lazy, cowardly, fainthearted, refined, unchanging, solid, fit, feeling good, hard-working, industrious, progress-minded, cheeky, kind, friendly, happy, cheerful, merry, thoughtful, considerate, hospitable, generous, educated, cultured; well informed, patient, dangerous, full-of-feeling, sentimental, brilliant, stingy, cheap, tight, rude, low, ignorant, pleasant, brilliant, genius, just; fair; impartial, valued, dear, appreciated, clever, skillful, skillful, clever (at), closed, reserved, talkative, chatty, talkative, sociable, healthy, conscientious, greedy, reliable, trustworthy, pathetic (towards); unconcerned (about), indifferent (to), happy, lucky, rude, generous, well-dressed, good-humoured, well informed (on), good-natured, stubborn, hard-headed, stubborn, domestic, home-loving, cheerful, bright, clear-headed, uninhibited, unworried, wonderful, magnificent, heartless, helpful, cooperative, helpful, deceitful, tricky, naughty, proud, snobby, stuck-up, polite, hungry, realistic
2a Listening and checking
Cella is asking Bill questions from a personality survey. Check the questions Cella asks.
Tapescript
Girl1: I just did a personality survey in Teen Time magazine. It tells you how confident you are.
Boy1: Oh? How did you do, Celia?
Girl1: I don’t know yet. But it’s a really interesting test. You should try it, Bill.
Boy1: OK.
Girl1: How about question 1? What would you do if the teacher asked you to give a speech in front of the whole school?
Boy1: I’d say I had a cold and couldn’t speak. I would be afraid to make a speech in front of the whole school.
Girl1: How about this movie question? What would you do if someone asked you to be in a movie?
Boy1: Oh, I’d say no. I’d be too nervous. What’s the next question?
Girl1: Let’s see…
2b Listening and circling
You shall listen again to the recording and circle Bill’s responses. Copy the phrases from the listening script.
do a personality survey, in Teen Time magazine, a really interesting test, give a speech, in front of the whole school, have a cold, be afraid to make a speech, in front of the whole school, in a movie
2c Doing pairwork
In pairs ask and answer the questions in the personality survey on page 29.
3a Reading and filling
Look at the survey in 2a and read the personality survey result below on page 30. Fill in the balnks with a, b or c.
3b Looking and writing
Next you are to write your own personality survey based on the that in 2a.
4 Doing groupwork
Ask students in your group the questions from your survey. Discuss the results.
Closing down by taking a personality survey
Read each statement carefully, and choose one answer from “Strongly Agree”, “Agree”, “Disagree”, “ Strongly Disagree” as a description of you.
Questions Strongly Agree Agree Disagree Strongly Disagree
Waste my time?
Often feel blue?
Seldom feel blue?
Have little to say?
Do not like art?
Believe in the importance of art?
Dislike myself?
Have a good word for everyone?
Feel comfortable with myself?
Feel comfortable around people?
Am not interested in abstract ideas?
Have a sharp tongue?
Are always prepared?
Keep in the background?
Pay attention to details?
Rarely get irritated?
Respect others?
Make friends easily?
Have a vivid imagination?
Find it difficult to get down to work?
Am not easily bothered by things?
Know how to captivate people?
Avoid philosophical discussions?
Accept people as they are?
Get chores done right away?
skilled in handling social situations?
Cut others to pieces?
Carry out my plans?
Am very pleased with myself?
Would describe my experiences as somewhat dull?
Do not enjoy going to art museums?
Suspect hidden motives in others?
Do just enough work to get by?
often down in the dumps?
Tend to vote for liberal political candidates?
Tend to vote for conservative political candidates?
Make people feel at ease?
Make plans and stick to them?
Have frequent mood swings?
Don't like to draw attention to myself?
Carry the conversation to a higher level?
Get back at others?
Don't see things through?
Panic easily?
Don't talk a lot?
Enjoy hearing new ideas?
Insult people?
Shirk my duties.
Believe that others have good intentions?
SELF CHECK
1.Filling the blanks
On page 31 is a box with sentences in black. Read them and fill in the blanks with a correct word given. Make changes to the form if necessary.
2.Reading an e-mail
Read the e-mail from Fran and copy all the expressions.
Subject: Can you help? From: Fran
Dear Knowledgeable,
My best friend, Mei, has a problem. There is a really important English speech contest for our whole city next month. Our classmates want her to represent the class in the school contest. Everyone is sure she will win. It’s probably true. Mei is very clever, and can speak English really well. In fact, she always comes top in the school exams. The problem is that she’s very shy. She doesn’t want to let her friends down, but she’s terrified of speaking in front of other people. She’s my friend, so she can tell me that she’s shy. But she can’t tell everyone that. I don’t think they would believe her. I can’t think of any good advice to give her, but you always come up with good solutions to people’s problems. What do you think I should tell Mei? What do you think I should tell the rest of the students? Fran
Just for fun
To end this period let’s do something fun-to find the animals.
Reading: What would you do if …?
Before you read, go to page 148 to learn the words for this reading passage first.
While you read, put the sentences into thought groups and underline all the useful phrases to be copied later after class.
Martin Robinson is a famous doctor/ who has a lot of experience/ dealing with teenagers. His new book/ What Would You Do/ If…? came out/ last month. It gives advice/ on what to do/ in lots of different situations. Here are two pages/ from the book.
ACCIDENTS
Question 1: What would you do/ if you cut yourself/ by accident?
Doctor: You should cover the cut/ with a clean cloth /and press it/ hard. If it’s a deep cut, you should see a doctor.
Question 2: If my grandmother fell downstairs, and wasn’t moving, I’d hurry/ to call the hospital/ first. Is that/ correct?
Doctor: Yes, speed is very important. Get the medical help/ first, then make her comfortable/ and stay/ with her.
Question 3: What would you do/ if you burned yourself/ by accident?
Doctor: Well, first find out/ how bad/ it is. Then/ put the burned area/ under cold running water.
Question 4: What would you do/ if you injured your knee /while running?
Doctor: If I felt some pain, I’d stop exercising. And/ if it hurt/ for more than a few days, I’d see a doctor.
PROBLEMS
Problem 1: A friend offers you cigarettes/ at a party.
Advice: Of course/ you should refuse！If I were you, I’d also talk to your friend/ about the dangers of smoking.
Problem 2: Children often think/ medicine is candy/ and eat it.
Advice: You must always hide medicine/ from children, and/ you should tell children/ to ask their parents/ before they eat “candy”/ they find.
Problem 3: An “internet friend” has asked/ if you could meet.
Advice: You should tell your parents/ about it, agree to meet/ in a public place, and you shouldn’t go alone.
Problem 4: You get pimples/ when you are nervous.
Advice: You should drink lots of water/ and ask your doctor for advice.
Part 2: Teaching Resources (第二部分：教学资源)
A Personality survey
In School
1. I like teachers who set routines and have organized ways of conducting classes.
2. I like classes to be “hands on,” I like to play games, compete, and solve problems.
3. I like my teachers, especially those who are friendly.
4. I learn best by working by myself.
5. I prefer teachers who stay on one topic at a time.
6. I like classes that have contests, changes of pace, and variety.
7. My favorite subjects are about people, such as language, drama, and literature.
8. I am easily bored if the subject holds no interest to me.
9. I like subjects that are useful and traditional, such as history and government.
10. My favorite subjects are music, art, and crafts.
11. I am social and work best in a group setting.
12. Sometimes, it is hard for me to decide what's important, because so many things are interesting to me.
With Friends
13. I prefer friends who are careful with their money and who make plans ahead of time.
14. Planning ahead bores me because I never know what I want to do until the moment arrives.
15. I am sensitive to rejection and need to know that a person cares about me.
16. I may seem distant and without emotions.
17. I like my friends to be loyal, dependable, and on time.
18. I like to excite my friends with new and different things.
19. I appreciate real, human feedback and like to receive notes and gifts.
20. I am uneasy about showing my emotions.
With Family
21. I like stability and security and enjoy traditions and celebrations.
22. I need a lot of space and freedom.
23. I like to be happy and loving.
24. I am probably seen as a loner because I like a lot of private time to think.
25. I like to spend holidays with family members and plan on such gatherings for months and months.
26. It is hard for me to follow rules and I feel we all should just enjoy one another.
27. I am very sensitive to rejection from my family and to family conflicts.
28. Sometimes, I find activities boring and have difficulty following family rules that don't make sense to me.
九年级英语上册教案【篇14】
Unit 4 what would you do? 教案示例（1）
I. Analysis of the Teaching Material
1. Status and Function
In this unit students learn to talk about imaginary situations. Such topic enables students to activate their imagination and raises learning interest of students.
All the students are active in such activities.
(1) The first period introduces the key vocabulary words and the target language in this unit. The topic, what would you do if you had a lot of money, makes the introduction easier.
(2) In the second period, students will learn to give advice to someone who is in an embarrasing situation by listening and pairwork activities with the target language.
(3)All the activities in the third period are designed to give students a rein forced practice in the use of the target language.
(4)In the fourth period, the first part is a vocabulary expansion activity. The other activities provide students with much integrating practice using the old and new target language.
(5) The fifth period provides students with much reading and writing practice. So it’s helpful to improve students’ reading and writing skills.
(6)The Self check in the sixth period shows students what they have learned. The making sentences and writing an e-mail activities are used to train students’ ability of reading and writing.
2. Teaching Aims and Demands
(1)Knowledge Objects
To make students grasp how to talk about imaginary situations.
To make students grasp how to give advice using the target language.
(2) Ability Objects
To train students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing skills.
To train students’ communicative competence.
(3) Moral Objects
Imaginary situations are unreal. Do remember: it’s really cool to realize your dream through great efforts.
Two heads are better than one. Be ready to help others.
In the United States, teenagers get their pocket money by helping parents with housework. It is a little different from that in China.
3. Teaching Key Points
To learn the key vocabulary words and the target language.
To make students use the target language to give advice.
4. Teaching Difficult Point
To train students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing skills by many different kinds of activities.
5. Studying Ways
Teach students how to communicate with others.
Teach students how to give advice when someone is in trouble.
Ⅱ. Language Function
Talk about imaginary situations.
Ⅲ. Target Language
1. What would you do if you won a million dollars?
I’d give it to medical research.
2.I can’t sleep the night before an exam.
What should I do?
If I were you, I’d take a long walk before going to bed.
Ⅳ.Structures
1. Second conditional
2. Should for advice
Ⅴ. Vocabulary
lottery, million, pimple, energetic, confident, shirt, tie, medical research
Ⅵ. Recycling
charity, present, fruit, vegetable, snack, shy, creative, outgoing, nervous, relax,
late, tired
Ⅶ. Learning Strategies
1. Matching
9. Listening for key words
Ⅷ. Teaching Time
Seven periods
The First Period
Ⅰ. Teaching Aims and Demands
1.Knowledge Object
(1) Key Vocabulary
lottery, million, medical, research
(2) Target Language
Look. This girl won a million dollars in the lottery.
Wow! What would you do if you won a million dollars?
I’d give it to medical research.
(3)Structure
I would/I’d do
2. Ability Objects
(1) Train students’ listening skill.
(2) Train students’ communicative competence.
3. Moral Object
If you won a million dollars, you’d buy a big house, buy a car and so forth. However do remember it’s really being cool to realize your dream through great efforts.
Ⅱ.Teaching Key Points
1. Target language
2. The structure: I would/I’d do
Ⅲ. Teaching Difficult Point
The structure: I would/I’d do
Ⅳ. Teaching Methods
1. Scene teaching Method
2. Teaching by induction
3. Pairwork
Ⅴ. Teaching Aid
A tape recorder
Ⅳ. Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
Review the structure “should be allowed to” by asking students to make sentences about school rules.
Step Ⅱ 1a
This activity focuses on vocabulary and structures introduced in the unit.
Read the instructions to the class.
Call students’ attention to the words in the box. Ask a student to read them to the class.
Say, What would you do if you had a lot of money? Add more ideas to the list.
Then share your answers with other students.
Get students to complete the task. First individually, then in groups.
As they work, walk around the room checking progress and offering any help they may need.
Collect answers from students on the blackboard.
Answers will vary but should include a mixture of ideas for helping themselves and others.
Step Ⅲ 1b
This activity gives students practice understanding the target language in spoken conversation.
Read the instructions to the class.
Read the question in the speech bubble.
Explain the word lottery to students.
Say, You will hear teenagers talking about what they would do if they won the lottery.
Point to the pictures. Ask students to describe them one by one.
For example, for Picture One, a student might say, “If I won the lottery, I’d buy a big house.”
Point out the sample answer. Say, The first picture you will hear about has the number one on it.
Play the recording for the first time.
Students only listen.
Play the recording again. This time students listen and number the pictures in the order they hear them.
Check the answers.
Answers
2,1,4,3
Tapescript
Girl 1: Hey, did you see this newspaper article? A girl won a million dollars in the lottery. She was only 14.
Boy 1: Wow, how luck!
Girl 1: What would you do if you won the lottery?
Boy 1:If I won the lottery, I’d give the money to the 200. I want to help the pandas.
Girl 1:That’s a good idea! I know what I’d do. If I won the lottery, I’d buy a big house for my family.
Girl 2: Really? I’d put the money in the bank. Then I’d just watch it grow!
Boy 2: Hmmmm… I think I’d give the money to medical research. I’d want to help other people.
Step Ⅳ 1c
This activity provides oral practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class.
Call students’ attention to the conversation in the box. Explain the vocabulary words million and medical research. Invite a pair of students to read it to the class.
SA :Look! This girl won a million dollars in the lottery.
SB: Wow ! What would you do if you won a million dollars?
SA: I’d give it to medical research.
Write it on the blackboard.
Say, Pretend you are the people in the picture. Talk with your partner about what you would do if you won a million dollars.
Get students to work in pairs. As they work in pairs together, walk around the room offering language support as needed.
After students have had a chance to practice several exchanges, ask pairs to come to the front of the classroom and act out their conversations.
Step Ⅴ Summary
In this class, we’ve learned some vocabulary words and the target language what would you do if you won the lottery? I’d give it to medical research.
Step Ⅵ Homework
If you had a large amount of money, e, g. ￥100,000 what would you buy? Please write down each item and its cost to see when you will spend the full amount. And bring your lists to class tomorrow.
Step Ⅶ Blackboard Design
Unit 4 What would you do?
Section A
The First Period
Target language:
A: Look. This girl won a million dollars in the lottery.
B: Wow! What would you do if you won a million dollars?
A: I’d give it to medical research.
Unit 4 what would you do 教案示例（2）
Ⅰ. Teaching Aims and Demands
1. Knowledge Objects
(1) Key Vocabulary tie
(2) Target Language
What would you do if you won a million dollars?
I’d give it to charities.
If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
If I were you, I’d take an umbrella.
2. Ability Objects
(1)Train students’ listening skill.
(2) Train students’ communicative competence.
3. Moral Object
Two heads are better than one. Give some direction to those who are in trouble.
Ⅱ. Teaching Key Points
1．Listening Practice
2．Target language
Ⅲ. Teaching Difficult Point
Train students’ ability to use the target language.
Ⅳ. Teaching Methods
1．Listening to cassettes
2．Pairwork
3．Teaching by induction
Ⅴ. Teaching Aids
1．A tape recorder
2．A picture of a person in a lion’s cage
3．A projector
Ⅵ. Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
Check homework. Students talk about how to spend a large amount of money.
Invite a student to come to the front of The class and ask, if you had 100,000 yuan, what would you buy? Students take turns answering his/her question.
Step Ⅱ 2a
This activity provides practice understanding the target language in spoken conversation.
Focus attention on the picture. Ask students to describe it. Help students say that the boy is going to somewhere, but he doesn’t know what to wear. The girl is helping him to pick out clothes.
Point to the list of reasons. Invite a student to read them to the class.
Say, You are to listen to a conversation between Larry and the girl and circle the reasons. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen. Play the recording a second time. This time students listen and circle the reasons.
Check the answers.
Answers
Circle items:2,3,5
Tapescript
Girl 1：Where are you going, Larry?
Boy 1:To Tom’s party.
Girl 1:Lucky you! I’d love to go to that party !
Boy 1: Yeah, well, I’m a little nervous. I don’t know what to wear.
Girl 1: If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
Boy 1: What if everybody else is wearing jeans and T-shirts?
Girl 1: Oh, you shouldn’t worry about what other people are wearing.
Boy 1: And I don’t have a present. What if everyone brings a present?
Girl 1: If I were you, I’d take a small present-a pen or something.
Keep it in your pocket and if everyone has a present, you can give him yours. If not, you can keep it.
Boy 1：OK. But what if I don’t know anyone?
Girl 1: If you don’t know anyone, you can talk to Tom. He’ll introduce you to people.
Boy 1 : I guess I can do that.
Girl 1: Look! You’re sure to have fun.
But if you’re still nervous, you can leave.
Step Ⅲ 2b
This activity provides listening practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class.
Point to the list of sentences. Invite a student to read them to the class.
Say, You will listen to the same conversation again. This time you are to check the four things Larry’s sister says to him.
Play the recording again. Students listen and check the things.
Check the answers.
Answers
Checked items: 1,2,4,5
Step Ⅳ 2c
This activity provides oral practice using the target language.
Point to the list of Larry’s worries in the box. Invite a student to read them to the class.
Ask students to look back at the list of checked sentences.
Read the instructions to the class. Say,
Please make conversations using information from Activities 2b and 2c.
Ask a pair of students to demonstrate a conversation to the class.
SA: I don’t know what to wear.
SB: If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
Get students to work in pairs. As the pairs work together, walk around the room listening in on various pairs and giving language and pronunciation support as needed.
After all the students have a chance to play both parts, stop the activity. Ask different students to perform their conversations.
Optional activity
Ask students to write down a problem they have on a piece of paper. Have students exchange papers with one another and read the one they receive. Then ask students to write two pieces of advice they would give the other student. Ask a student to read his/her advice to the class. The rest guess the problem.
Step Ⅴ Grammar Focus
Ask different students to read the question and answer and the statements to the
class.
S1:What would you do if you won a million dollars?
S2:I’d give it to charities.
S3:If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
S4:If I were you, I’d take an umbrella.
Write them on the blackboard.
Show a picture of someone in a lion’s cage on the screen by a projector. Ask students
questions pointing to the picture.
T: Have you ever been in a lion’s cage?
Ss: No.
T: That’s right. None of us has ever been in a lion’s cage. What would you do if you were in a lion’s cage? (Write the question on the blackboard.)
S1:I’d call for help. (Write the sentence on the blackboard.)
T: What about you?
S1:I’d get out fast. (Write the sentence on the blackboard. )
Get several more examples from other students.
Say, When we talk about things that haven’t happened, we often use the word would (underline the word would in the question). Apostrophe’d is the abbreviation of the word would ( underline the abbreviation ‘d in the answers).
Then underline the word were in the two statements. Say, When you tell someone what you would do, you use the expression if I were you. Get all the students to read the target language on the blackboard.
Pronunciation note
When saying the words would you in phrases such as what would you do…,
English speakers often run the words together and pronounce these words as if they were spelled wudjuh.
Step Ⅵ Summary
Say, In this class, we’ve learned the target language I’d give it to charities and If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie. And we’ve also done much listening practice using the target language.
Step Ⅶ Homework
Say, If your teacher criticized you, but in fact it isn’t your fault, what would you do? Get students to make a list.
StepⅧ Blackboard Design
Unit 4 What would you do?
Section A
The Second Period
Target language:
A: What would you do if you won a million dollars?
B: I’d give it to charities.
A: If I were you, I’d wear a shirt and tie.
B: If I were you, I’d take an umbrella.
A: What would you do if you were in a lion’s cage?
B: I’d call for help.
C. I’d get out fast.
Unit 4 what would you do 教案示例（3）
Ⅰ. Teaching Aims and Demands
1.Knowledge Objects
(1) Key Vocabulary
pimple, trouble
(2) Target Language
I can’t sleep the night before an exam.
Then I’m too tired to do well. What should I do?
If I were you, I’d take a long walk before going to bed.
I really want a dog, but my parents won’t let me have one.
Well, dogs can be a lot of trouble. Maybe you should get a small pet, like a goldfish.
That’s a good idea.
2. Ability Objects
(1) Train students’ reading skills.
(2) Train students’ integrating skills.
3. Moral Object
Everyone may have some trouble. Don’t worry.
Ⅱ. Teaching Key Point
1. Reading
2. Target language
Ⅲ. Teaching Difficult Point
Give advice using the target language.
Ⅳ. Teaching Methods
1. Reading Practice
2. Pairwork
Ⅴ. Teaching Aid
The blackboard
Ⅵ. Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
Check homework. Get students to talk about what they would do if a teacher criticized them. For example, a student might say I’d explain to the teacher and so forth.
Step Ⅱ 3a
This activity provides reading practice using the target language. Point to the problems on the left. Ask different students to read them to the class.
Point out the pieces of advice on the right. Get different students to read them to the class.
Point out the sample answer. Invite a pair of students to read the problem and the piece of advice to the class.
SA: I’m really shy and I just don’t enjoy parties. I don’t know what to say or do.
Ss: If I were you, I’d talk to someone who looks friendly. Then you won’t feel so shy.
Say, Please match each problem on the left with the correct advice on the right.
Get students to complete the activity on their own. As they work individually, move around the room answering any questions students raise and offering help as needed.
Check the answers.
Answers
1. c 2. a 3. b
Step Ⅲ 3b
This activity provides oral practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class. Invite a pair of students to read the sample conversation.
SA:I can’t sleep the night before an exam. Then I’m too tired to do well.
What should I do?
SB: If I were you, I’d take a long walk before going to bed. That should help you relax.
Say, Please think of different advice for the problems in Activity 3a.
Collect suggestions from students. For example, for the third problem, a student might say, If I were you, I’d watch TV to relax my mind.
Ask students to make conversations with partners using new suggestions to each problem. As they work in pairs, walk around the room offering language support as needed.
After each student has a chance to play both parts, stop the activity. Get several pairs of students to say their conversations.
Step Ⅳ Part 4
This activity provides writing, listening and speaking practice using the target
language.
Read the instructions to the class. Get a pair of students to say the sample conversation to the class.
SA:I really want a dog, but my parents won’t let me have one.
SB:Well, dogs can be a lot of trouble.
Maybe you should get a small pet, like a goldfish.
SA:That’s a good idea.
Write the conversation on the blackboard.
Point out the sample answers in the chart.
Say, What problems do you have at home? At school? Make a list in the chart. Then ask your classmates for advice and write their advice in the chart too.
Get students to complete the activity in groups of four. As the groups work together, move around the room to make sure students discuss the topic in English and know how to fill in the chart.
Check the answers by asking different pairs of students to say their conversations to the class.
Answers will vary.
Optional activity
Ask, What would you do if there were no classes tomorrow? Ask students to write as many answers as they can. Then get students to work in pairs. One ask the other the question and see how many new answers the other is able to think of.
Step Ⅴ Summary
Say, In this class, we’ve done a lot of reading, speaking and writing practice using the target language.
Step Ⅵ Homework
(1) Review the target language by reading the conversations in Activity 3a.
(2)Finish off the exercises on pages 11～12 of the workbook.
Step Ⅶ Blackboard Design
Unit 4 What would you do?
Section A
The Third Period
Target language:
A:I can’t sleep the night before an exam. Then I’m too tired to do well.
What should I do?
B: If I were you, I’d take a long walk before going to bed. That should help you relax
A:I really want a dog, but my parents won’t let me have one.
B: Well, dogs can be a lot of trouble.
Maybe you should get a small pet, like a goldfish.
A: That’s a good idea.
九年级英语上册教案【篇15】
一、重点短语
1. 处于困境 in trouble
2. 比如 for example3. 和……比较 compare... with...4. 吵闹;喧哗 make a noise5. 隔壁;相邻 next to6. 用……填充…… fill...with7. 期待 look forward to8. 不仅……而且 as well as 9. 注意 pay attention to10. 发现;查明 find out11. 得知 learn about 12. 所有年龄段的 of all ages13. 全世界 in the whole world
二、重点句型1. It’s against ... 这是违反……
2. That’s no good. 那样不好。3. No wonder ... 难怪……
三、重点语法if 从句 1：if 从句 + 祈使句
1. 结构：“if 从句 + 祈使句”意为“如果……，就 / 要……”。
2. 用法：① “if从句+祈使句”结构中，if引导的从句可以放在主句之前，也可以放在主句之后。② if 从句在前时，主从句之间必须用逗号隔开。③ 主句是祈使句，if 从句要用一般现在时。例如：If you want to leave, drive slowly. 如果你想走，慢点开车。Stay at home if it rains. = If it rains, stay athome. 如果下雨，你就待在家。
表示禁止的结构1. “No + 名词 / 动名词!”句型常用于公共场合的提示语，意为“禁止……，不准……”。例如：No smoking! 禁止吸烟!No burning!禁止烟火!2. Don’t + 动词原形.例如：Don’t jump. 不准蹦跳。
英语七年级教案优选
通常教师在上课之前会使用教案课件，这些教案课件是经过认真设计的。精读教材有助于编写教案。是否了解“英语七年级教案”的所有信息呢？请允许小编向您介绍一下，感谢您的光临，希望这篇文章能够让您对这个世界有更深入的了解！
英语七年级教案(篇1)
新人教版约分教学设计(三)
教材简析与设计意图：
《约分》是人教版实验教材第十册内容，约分是分数基本性质的直接应用。新课标指出：义务教育阶段的数学课程应突出体现基础性、普及性和发展性，是数学教育面向全体学生，为学生的全面发展创造条件。要尊重学生身心发展特点和教育规律，转变教育观念，激发学生独立思考和创新意识，让学生既学会知识，又学会学习，使学生生动活泼积极主动地发展。
在约分教学中，注重培养学生的学习情感，激发发展动机;创造机会，提供发展条件;因材施教，扩大发展层面;激活思维，深化发展效果。引导学生积极主动地参与全过程，从而体现“以学生发展为本”的原则。
教学目标：1、经历知识的形成过程，使学生理解约分和最简分数的意义，探索约分的方法。
2、掌握约分的方法，能根据实际情况正确进行约分。
3、培养学生的观察、比较和归纳等思维能力。
教学重点：掌握约分的方法
教学难点：很快看出分子、分母的公因数，并能准确地判断约分的结果是不是最简分数。
教学过程：
一、情境导入，猜测验证
1、创设游泳情境，提出问题
师：让我们一起到游泳场看一场激烈的百米游泳比赛
(播放游泳比赛录像，学生聚精会神地观看比赛过程)
师：游在第一位的运动员已经游了75米。
师：一共100米，已经游了75米，看到这两个条件你能想到什么?
学生积极思考，各抒己见汇报自己的想法：
生1：还有25米没有游;
生2：已经游了全程的75/100;
生3：还剩全程的25/100没有游;
生4：已经游了全程的3/4;
生5：还有1/4没有游。
师：已经游了全程的 75/100和游了全程的3/4是一回事吗?
生1：不是
生2：是一回事
师：你能运用已经学过的知识验证你们的结论吗?
2、运用已经学过的知识进行验证
学生进行激烈的小组讨论并汇报
生： 我们组认为75/100=3/4，因为75÷100=0.75 3÷4=0.75 所以75/100=3/4
师：这是我们曾经学过的什么知识呢?
生：分数与除法的关系
师：你们运用分数与除法的关系找到它们是相等的，还有其他的验证方法吗?
生：我们运用分数的基本性质：75/100的分子和分母同时除以25，得到3/4。
师追问：为什么同时除以25?
生：25是75和100的最大公因数
师：你们组不仅运用了分数的基本性质，而且还找到了75和100的最大公因数25，从而验证出相等，能学以致用，多好啊!
(板书：75/100=3/4)
3、根据验证过程引出最简分数的意义
师：通过刚才的验证我们知道75/100=3/4，还能说出一些和3/4相等的分数吗?
生：6/8、12/16、15/20、30/40 ------
师：这些分数中哪个最简单，为什么?
生：3/4最简单，因为3/4的分子和分母是一对互质数。
师：什么是互质数?
生：公因数只有1的两个数是互质数。
师：其他同学听出来了吗，有个词用得很好?
生：是“只有”
师：对，我们就把分子和分母只有公因数1的这样的分数就叫做最简分数。
(板书：最简分数)
师：在黑板上你还能很快找出一个最简分数吗?
生：1/4
师：说说理由。
生：因为1/4的分子和分母只有公因数1，所以它是最简分数。
师：那你现在知道1/4和25/100的关系了吗?
生：也是相等的。
师：很好，你们还能再举出一些最简分数的例子吗?
学生举例
教师总结：同学们通过刚才的观察、猜测、验证得出了最简分数的意义，大家表现的非常好，下面我们就来把一个分数化简称最简分数。
二、自主探索约分的方法
1、理解意义
出示例4 ：把24/30化成最简分数
师：仔细读题，如何理解“化成最简分数”这句话。
生：就是把24/30变成和它大小相等，并且分子和分母的公因数只有1这样的分数。
师：同桌互相说一说该怎么做呢?
学生互说并汇报
生：24/30=24÷2/30÷2=12/15 12/15=12÷3/15÷3=4/5。
师：说说你是怎么想的?
生：先用24和30的公因数2去除，发现12/15不是最简分数，还有公因数3，再用3去除，最后得到最简分数4/5。
师：还有其他想法吗?
生：24/30=24÷6/30÷6=4/5 ，我是先找到24和30的最大公因数6，再用6去除分子和分母从而得到最简分数4/5。
师：同学们对比一下这两种方法，哪种更好一些呢?
生：找最大公因数的方法能更快地把一个分数化简成最简分数。
师小结：同学们运用分数的基本性质把24/30化简成最简分数，你们知道吗，刚才的这一过程叫做约分。(板书课题)
2、学生独立探究，尝试约分
学生看书P85，约分的一般方法
师：看完后，你能回答小精灵提出的问题“每一步中都是用分子、分母的哪个公因数去除的?"
学生边回答教师边演示约分的步骤及方法，并强调书写格式
师：在把一个分数化简成最简分数时，如果能很快找到分子和分母的最大公因数，就可以用最大公因数去约分，如果一下子找不到最大公因数，可以一步一步地用公因数去约分。下面请你仿照这一方法，把8/12进行约分。
学生自己完成
三、综合练习
1、情境中折纸表示8/32
出示蛋糕图
师：用你们手中的圆片代表蛋糕，并很快表示它的8/32。
学生积极思考，有的认真观察分数，有的急于动手折8/32，最终出现两种折法。
生1：我是把圆片对折了5次，平均分成了32份，再表示出其中的8份。
师：你很认真的折出了这个蛋糕的8/32，就是时间长了些，为什么有些同学却折得很快呢?
生2：我只折了它的1/4。
师：为什么?
生2：我发现8/32的分子和分母都有最大公因数8，约分后得到1/4。
师：多好啊!通过你的认真观察，运用今天学的知识-----约分，很快地找到了这个蛋糕的“8/32”，真是个善于动脑筋的孩子。
师小结：学习约分不仅可以分蛋糕，还可以运用到生活中的很多地方，只要你是个善于观察善于思考的孩子，你一定能做得最好、用得更好。
2、下面哪些分数没有化成最简分数，请把它们化成最简分数。
16/24=4/6 15/36=5/12 28/42=14/21 16/12=8/6
3、用最简分数表示小明每项活动占全天时间的几分之几?
4、我校六年级三个班在3.12的植树活动中，一班种了总数的17/30，二班种了总数的20/60，三班种了总数的7/30，你知道哪个植树最多吗?
生：20/60化简成10/30，在比较这三个分数的大小，发现哦一班种得最多。
师：你用约分的方法解决了生活中的实际问题，很好!完成了这道题后，同学们想说些什么呢?
生：看来约分不一定必须化简成最简分数，要根据实际而定。
师：说的多好啊!你们不仅会学以致用，而且还会根据实际情况灵活运用。
四、全课总结
师：今天这节课你有什么收获?
英语七年级教案(篇2)
教学内容：武松打虎
教学目标：
知识与能力目标
1．学会生字，理解新词。
2．能用自己的话讲述武松打虎场 景的精彩描写，想象武松打虎时的精彩场面。
过程与方法目标
朗读课文，理解课文内容，感受中国古典文学作品的语言魅力。
情感态度与价值观目标
激发学生对打虎英雄的崇敬之情。
教学重点 ：
读中感受作品的语言魅力，激发学生对打虎英雄的敬佩之情。
教学难点：
读中感受作品的语言魅力，激发学生对打虎英雄 的敬佩之情。
教学方法 默读 讨论
课时设计 三课时
第一课时
教 学 过 程
一、播放歌曲，激趣导入
（点击鼠标播放《好汉歌》）问：这首歌同学们熟悉吗？是哪一部电视剧的主题歌？关于《水浒传》你知道些什么？（学生结合自己的了解自由回答）
那么，今天我们就来学习中国古典四大名著之一的《水浒传》中的一个片断--《武松打虎》。
二、自读课文，学习字词。
1．自由读课文，自学文中的生字和新词。
2．交流字词学习情况。
（1）比较组词。
岗帐（）耻（）梁（）堂（）迸（）冈（）杖（）职（）粱（）膛（）并（）
（2）注意读音。
迸（bènɡ）、冈（ɡānɡ）
（3）注意字形。
（4）理解字词意思。
重点理解：
道、印信、榜文、端的、吃、存、绾、直 、却待、纳定、兀自、把棒撅了又打了一回，就
第二课时
三、再读课文，理清层次。
1、自由读课文，把字音读正确，把句子读通顺，想想文章讲了一件什么事？全文可以分成几个部分？
2．交流汇报。
文章记叙了武松乘着酒兴上了景阳冈，赤手空拳打死猛虎的故事。
课文可以分成两个部分。即：
第一部分（1-3自然段）写了武松上冈，看到印信榜文，才知道真的有虎，但决定继续上冈。
第二部分（4-6自然段）写武松赤手空拳与虎搏斗，终于打死了老虎。
四、布置作业。
1．抄写本课的生字新词。
2．朗读课文，达到正确、流利。
五、资料补充：
.“打虎”部分通过对人物动作的描写，突出了英雄形象。你认为前面的内容与“打虎”内容有关吗？又是通过什么描写来表现人物形象的？
通过对武松的语言描写，感受到武松的性格特点。
“这是店家的诡计，吓唬那些胆小的人到他家里去歇。我怕什么！”能够体会出武松的勇敢。
通 过对武松心里的描写，感受武松的内心变化，感受他的英雄气概。如“转身回酒店吧，一定会叫店家耻笑……”“怕什么，只管上去，看看怎么样。”这里虽有犹豫，但更多的仍然是“勇往直前”的豪气。当天将黑时，他见没有老虎，便“自言自语道：‘哪儿有什么大虫！是人自己害怕了，不敢上山。’”这是他在为自己壮胆，也很真实可信。所以这些内容看似与打虎无关，实际上与打虎的内容有着密切的关系。
（点击鼠标播放《好汉歌》）问：这首歌同学们熟悉吗？是哪一部电视剧的主题歌？关于《水浒传》你 知道些什么？（学生结合自己的了解自由回答）
脊：上半部笔顺为：先两边再中间，即：点、提、撇、点、撇、捺
梁：上下结构，不要写成左右结构，最后一笔是捺不是点。
多次读课文，对文章内容进行了解。
“别胡说！难道不付你钱！再筛 三碗来”体会出武松倔强、豪爽。
“就有大虫，我也不怕”体会到武松很勇敢。
第三课时
走进《水浒传》
主要内容是：宋朝统治者腐朽凶残，太尉高俅原本是个无赖，因为会踢球，得到了皇帝的赏识，从此青云直上，无恶不作。他的干独生子高衙内横行霸道，为了霸占八十万禁军总教头林冲的漂亮妻子，他诬蔑林冲带刀进入军机重地白虎堂图谋不轨，把林冲发配充军，还想在野猪林半路把他杀死，幸亏花和尚鲁智深仗义相救。蔡太师过生日，他的女婿搜刮十万贯金银财宝，送往京城庆贺，派杨志护送。晁盖、吴用、阮氏三兄弟等人定计智取生辰纲，事后与朝廷激战，最终大伙一块投奔梁山。又有 打虎英雄武 松因为西门庆勾结大嫂潘金莲害死大哥武大郎，因而将他们杀死，被判充军，最终经历一系列波折，他也被逼上梁山。此外还有宋江、鲁智深等众多好汉，共108人，最终都因为种种不同原因而被迫在梁山落草为寇，揭 杆起义。他们举起义旗，打着替天行道，劫富济贫的口号，杀遍大江南北，沉重地打击了反动统治者的嚣张气焰，张扬了人民群众的神勇斗志，干出了一番轰轰烈烈的大事业
1.姓名:豹子头林冲 京城八十万禁军教头
主要事件:风雪山神庙、火并王伦
正面评价:忠厚老实、武艺高强、善良
反面评价:懦弱隐忍
2.姓名:黑旋风李逵
主要事迹:坐堂 寿张县、为母杀四虎
正面评价:直爽、忠诚
反面评价:残暴、大老粗
3.姓名:活阎王阮小七
主要事迹:智劫生辰纲
正面评价:直爽、义气、水上功夫了得
反面评价:暂无
4.姓名:智多星吴用
主要事迹:智劫生辰纲
正面评价:足智多谋
反面评价:对宋江愚忠
5.姓名:呼保义宋江
主要事迹:杀 阎婆惜
正面评价:无
反面评价:不能文不能武，出身低微形容猥亵，趋炎附势，一心出人头地流芳百世
6.姓名:小李广花荣
主要事迹:三打扈家庄
正面评价:武艺非凡尤其射箭百步穿杨
反面评价:也愚忠宋江，不值
7.姓名:浪子燕青
主要事迹:擂台胜任源
正面评价:聪明机灵，努箭高明，识时务
反面评价:暂无
8.姓名:行者武松
主要事迹:景阳岗打虎、血溅鸳鸯楼
正面评价:武艺高强、性格刚烈
反面评价:有点残暴
9.姓名:青面兽杨志
主要事迹:遗失生辰纲、卖刀
正面评价:武艺高强
反面评价:暂无
10.姓名:花和尚鲁智深
主要事迹:拳打镇关西、倒拔垂杨柳、野猪林救林冲
正面评价:见义勇为、武功高强、力大无穷
反面评价:无
教学回顾
谭义专
[武松打虎 教学设计(人教版七年级下册)]
英语七年级教案(篇3)
对于七年级英语教师来说，英语教学工作的顺利开展需要有一套完整的教案来支撑，这样可以保证英语教学工作的顺利开展。但是对于多数教师来说，英语教案的设计与制作并不是一件容易的事情，需要花费心思去思考和设计，下面是沪江小编为大家提供的关于七年级英语教案的相关模板，希望能够帮助大家提升英语教案制作的效果。
Starter Unit 1
Good morning!
一、单元教材分析
本单元要求学生掌握英文字母A—H，能认读其印刷体和手写体字母的大小写等四种形式。书写(大写和小写，笔顺，笔画)基本合乎要求。学习一些简单的英文名字，注意区别性别，并为自己取一个英文名字。能看、听、说、唱本单元所列的日常交际用语，重点学会打招呼、相互问候并做到语音语调正确。注意一些字母及日常交际用语的发音，总结元音字母a和e的发音规则。
二、单元学情分析
本单元围绕“问候他人”这一话题，展开听、说、读、写的教学活动。为了创设较为真实的语言环境，首先让学生们认识一些较为简单的英文名字，并让学生们为自己取一个英文名字，让学生们感知、认识英语，并尽快进入英语的环境中。在教学过程中应让学生体会打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。刚开始学习英语，学生们肯定对学习英语的兴趣非常深厚，教师一定要利用好这一点，让学生在学习英语中能获得乐趣。并逐步让学生们形成稳定的学习兴趣。
三、单元教学建议
采用自主学习、小组合作学习、Role playing、 pair work等方式开展听、说、读、写的学习活动。教师要尽量利用幻灯片、挂图、实物等给学生创造较为真实的英语情景。在教学中创设切实可行的任务型教学活动、突出交际性。引趣激趣策略，创设情景调节气氛，引发激发学生兴趣。教师可以用手势，表情，动作等示意，帮助学生听懂课堂用语和日常交际用语，不讲或少讲汉语。
四、单元课时分配
本单元可用2课时完成教学任务：
(1a-2e) 用1课时
(3a-4d) 用1课时
(1a-2d)
五、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下词汇：字母Aa ~ Hh, good, morning, Good morning!, hi, hello
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① Good morning, Helen!
② Hello, Frank!
③ Hi, Bob!
3) 能理解用英语打招呼的不同说法，并能灵活运用。
4) 能掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
让学生们在相互问候的过程中，学会礼貌待人，与同学之间友好相处。万事开头难，首先利用这个单元培养学生们对英语的兴趣，因为兴趣是最好的老师。
六、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。
2) 学习用英语进行见面打招呼，并能体会不同的打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。
3) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2. 教学难点：
1) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。
七、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead in
Listen to a “Good morning!” song. Then Ss learn to sing this song.
(利用JEFC教材中的Good morning!歌曲导入新课.)
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Come into the classroom and greet the class with a smile and say Good morning! Now, introduce the words “teacher” and “class” by using gestures. Repeat this several times and have the class repeat after you. Students can answer as a whole group, as rows and as individuals.
T: (By gestures) "Teacher; Class"
Ss: (Repeat after teacher) "Teacher; Class"
2. Point to yourself and say I’m Miss/Mr. … Have them repeat. Explain the terms Miss and Mr. in Chinese. Ss repeat this a few times with rows and individuals.
Ss: Miss/ Ms. … (Ss repeat)
Ss: Morning, Miss/Ms. … (Ss repeat)
Ss: Good morning, Ms., Mr. … (Ss repeat)
3. Leave the classroom, return and say Good morning, class! Help the students respond with Good morning, Miss/Mr. … Say "Sit down, please. Now let’s start the lesson."
(Practice it several times.)
Ⅲ. Game (Choose an English name.)
1. T: We have many new friends in our class this year. They are from the U.S.A. and England. Who are they? Do you want to know them? Now please look at the screen.
(过大屏幕展示第一页上的彩图，然后再展示单张图片，并分别与名字相对应。)
(Show the picture of Bob.)
T: This is Bob. (Teach Ss "Bob")
Ss: Bob (Ss read after the teacher.)
(Then teach the name: Dale, Frank and Eric in the same way. Tell Ss they're boys.)
(Show the picture of Grace.)
T: This is Grace. (Teach Ss "Grace")
Ss: Grace (Ss read after the teacher.)
(Then teach the name: Helen, Cindy and Alice in the same way. Tell Ss they're girls.)
2. Ss read the names aloud. Then let some Ss read the names to the class.
3. T: Now let's work on 1a. Look at the picture in 1a and write down the names in the picture. Attention: Which are boys' names and which are girls' names?
4. Choose a name for yourself in a group. Then practice saying: "I'm …” (用汉语说明I'm… 意为“我叫……名字。”)
S1: I'm Alice.
S2: I'm Bob.
…
Ⅳ. Listening
1. Tell Ss that our new friends are greeting each other. Please keep quite and listen the recording.
(教师播放录音三次，第一次学生们仅听，第二次和第三次学生们跟读。注意可运用暂停键来让学生们有足够的时间读完。)
2. Ss listen and repeat after the recording.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1.(让学生们看1a图画中的人物的对话，告诉学生图画中有三组对话，分别是Bob与Helen的对话;Dale与Eric及Frank的对话;Cindy与Alice的对话。)
T: You are Bob, your partner is Helen. You are Dale, your partner is Eric. Then you are Cindy, your partner is Alice. Practice the conversations.
Ss practice the conversations in pairs.
T: Exchange the roles. And practice the conversations again.
Ss exchange the roles and practice the conversations again.
2. 运用刚学的句型，并用刚才自己所选择的英文名字来相互问候。
S1: Good morning, Cindy!
S2: Hello, Frank!
S3: Good morning, Grace!
S4: Hi, Bob!
Ⅵ. Listening
1. (告诉学生们英语中有26个英语字母，它们就像我们汉语的笔画一样是构成单词的要素。下面我们先来学习字母Aa ~ Hh。其中A、B、C、D、E、F、G、H是大写字母;a、b、c、d、e、f、g、h是小写字母。)
2. 教师播放录音三次，第一次学生们仅听，第二次和第三次学生们跟读。注意可运用暂停键来让学生们有足够的时间读完。
3. Let some Ss read out the letters Aa ~ Hh. (注意纠正学生们不准确的读音)
4. Let Ss try to remember the letters Aa ~ Hh.
5. Now let's work on 2b. Listen and number the letters you hear [1-8].
(教师播放录音三次，第一次学生们仅听，第二次听录音填编号、第三次听录音校对答案。)
Ⅶ. Writing
1. T: Now let's learn how to write these letters. First look at the picture carefully in 2c. Then tell us how to write these English letters.
2. Ss read and find out the writing rules of the letters Aa ~ Hh.
S1：大字字母都是占上两格。
S2：字母a、c、e占中间的一格。
S3：字母b、d、h占上两格。
S4：字母g占下两格。
S5：字母f占三格。
3. Ss try to copy the letters by themselves. T goes around the classroom to give any help.
4. Let some Ss come to the Bb, and write down the letters on the Bb. Check with the whole class.
Ⅷ. Practice
1. Tell Ss to look at the picture in 2d. First, read the letters aloud. Then let some Ss read the letters to the class aloud.
2. Let Ss try to write down the missing letters. Check the answers with your partner.
3. Let some Ss come the Bb and write missing letters on the Bb.
(注意看学生们的字母笔顺是否正确，纠正不正确的笔顺，并让其他学生引起注意。)
Ⅸ. Read and Talk
1. Let Ss look at the pictures in 2e. Let some Ss read the letters below each picture.
2. Let some Ss talk about the meaning of each picture.
S1: HB (铅笔芯)硬黑
S2: CD 光盘;激光唱片
Ⅹ. Game
Let the students do some letters games to enjoy your lesson，the following is the instruction.
英语七年级教案(篇4)
教学目标
能够掌握常见物品的英文表达
能够询问教室物品或文具名称并找到物主
能够综合运用所学句型汇报活动结果
教学向导
语言目标 学习策略与思维技巧 重点词汇
运用this /that 的一般疑问句及其答句；What 引导的特殊疑问句及其简略回答。 以游戏的形式，做出推理与判断，培养综合分析能力。 pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key,ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook
语言结构 语言功能 跨学科学习
Demonstratives this, that;
What questions;
Yes/No questions and short answers
How do you spell pencil?
(Formulaic) 寻找物主 培养学生绘画和写作能力
主题词表
pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key, ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook
Extensive words:
textbook; exercise-book; ball-pen; compass; sharpener; rubber; glue; color-pen; sticker; highlight; ball-point; scissors; chalk; file; blackboard; ink; set- square; paper; pamphlet; peg.
重点句型
(1)Is this your pencil? Yes, it is./No, it isn’t.
(2)Is that my book? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
(3)Is this/that her/his eraser? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
(4)What’s this/ that in English? It’s a/an ……
(5)How do you spell pen? P-E-N.
主题思维图及任务型活动
课前准备
让学生收集并自学有关文具或教室物品的名词，并准备一些实物或图片。教师事先应对学生常用的文具有所了解，同时收集部分同学的物品，对于不能出示实物的用具则应准备一些简图。让学生挑选一件自己喜欢物品的实物或图片，并为该它制作一个英文标签，即写出该物品的英文名称；教师也可根据将学生学习新词时感觉困难的词语，制作自己的标签，将其放入学生的物品中；同时为各小组准备好活动用的纸盒或袋子。
Task One: Lead in---Learning words.
教学目的：学习有关文具的英文表达方式
需要学习和掌握的新单词与新句型：pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key, ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook
1. Is this your pencil? Yes, it is./No, it isn’t.
2. Is that my book? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
3. Is this/that her/his eraser? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
4. What’s this/ that in English? It’s a/an ……
5. How do you spell pen? P-E-N.
Step 1: 出示实物或图片，问学生What’s this/ that in English?导入Task One中新词。(pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key, ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook )板书目标词汇。
Step 2: 抽取学生中的文具由学生问，学生答；复习上一步所学单词。
Step 3: 从学生中收取一部分文具，引入句型Is this your pencil? Yes, it is./No, it isn’t.
或Is that my book? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t. etc.
Task Two: Guessing game( Finding the owners)
教学目的：巩固目标词汇和Is this your pencil?
Yes, it is./No, it isn’t. etc.
复习What’s this/ that in English? It’s a/an ……
How do you spell pen? P-E-N.
Step 1: 每位学生将自己准备好的物品放进一个袋子里。
Step 2: 教师与一位学生做示范。为接下来的Group work 作铺垫。需要用到的句型打在屏幕上。
Step 3: 学生开始做Group work。
Step 4: 展示各小组统计的结果，看哪组同学在规定时间内猜出的物品的主人最多。
Task Three: Competition.
教学目的：培养学生在一定语境下综合运用目标语的能力。
Step 1: 在小组内部将各自的文具汇集到一处。运用句型：This is my …….
Step 2: 交换小组成员。来自外组的同学负责寻找相关文具的主人。运用句型：Is this your……? Is this Jane’s ……?
Step 3: 完成下表并由Group Leader 进行汇报。
stationery
Owner sharpener Pencilcase eraser dictionary
Homework:
Write down a dialogue using the words and the target languages.
Preview the content of the next period.
Blackboard writing
Unit 2 Is this your pencil?
What’s this /that in English? It’s a/an……
How do you spell…?
Is this your/Tina’s backpack?
Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t. It’s his/Mary’s.
英语七年级教案(篇5)
Unit 3
How do yougetto school?
Section A
The first period
一 教学目的：
1.学习Section A 中的生词。
2.学习句型：How do yougetto school?
3.词组：
takethe train
take the bus
take the subway
ride a bike
二、教学重点：同上
三、教学难点：本课中生词的拼写。
四、教学过程:
Step1Learn the new words.
train ,take the train .bus
take the bus .subway ,
ridebikeride a bike
Step2Introduction
Ask the students like this:
How do yougetto school?
Then ask some students to answer thisquestion.
Step3Practice
Match the wordswith the pictures
1.takethetrain(a)
2.take the bus(
3.take the subway(e)
4.ride a bike(b)
5walk(c)
Step4Listen
Listen and write the numbers next to the correct students in the picture aboveStep 5Practice
Make a conversation with your partner about how the students get to schoolFor example ：How does LiFei get to school?
She takes the subway
五、布置作业。
英语七年级教案(篇6)
七年级英语备课教案4篇
英语老师应抓住学生爱说爱闹、敢想敢说的心理特点，创造一个开放宽松的教学环境。经过一段时间的英语教学，对于一篇初一七年级英语教案你知道如何写吗？你是否在找正准备撰写“七年级英语备课教案”，下面小编收集了相关的素材，供大家写文参考！
七年级英语备课教案篇1
Language Goal:
Talk about what people are doing.
Teaching Aims:
The present Progressive (结构式: Be + V-ing )
Key Points:
---What’s he doing ?
---He’s reading.
Difficult points:
现在进行时的用法和动词V-ing 形式的构成。
Teaching Methods:
由浅入深,设置场景、对话以及表演来教授新句型。
Teaching Aids:
教学图片、教学光盘、VCD机、录音机
Teaching Procedures:
Step1. Warming – up
A. Duty report
Teacher: How are you, boys and girls?
S s : Fine, thank you.
Teacher: OK, who’s on duty today?
(the student who is on duty starts to make a duty report)
B. Ask and answer
(The teacher asks some Ss to answer questions and writes down the verbs in the sentences on the blackboard.)
T: Usually, what time do you go to school?
S1: ……
T: When does your father watch TV in the evening?
S2: ……
T: Do you do your homework in the evening?
S3: ……
T: When do you play soccer?
S4: ……
T: what time do you usually eat dinner?
S5: ……
(The teacher should encourage the students after questions.)
The teacher ask the students to read these five verbs for several times.
Step 2. Presentation
A. Match the words and the activities.
Ask the students to turn to page 83, and look at the pictures in 1a.
Then,the teacher ask questions:
----What’s he doing? (Picture 1)
----He’s making a telephone call.
(Help the students answer the question with body language .)
Ask and answer just like that, and finish 1a.(Ss can guess the meaning of doing homework, watching TV, cleaning, eating dinner and reading.)
The Ss read these V-ing words after the teacher.
B. Play the video.
To make the Ss clear what they are learning in this class. Mr. Gong’s words do give the teacher a big hand.
(Write down the title of Unit 14 I’m watching TV on the blackboard and ask the Ss to read it.)
C. Teach the Present Progressive.
1. Introduction
Tell the Ss what the Present Progressive is. (现在进行时表示现在正在进行或发生的动作, 它的表现形式为Be Verbs + V-ing ---- 这也即为它的结构式.)
2. Tell the difference
Write down the V-ing forms by another lines of go, watch, do, play and eat on the blackboard. Ask the Ss to have a look and find the difference between them. For example: go and going, watch and watching, do and doing, etc. Then, ask the Ss to read them again.
3. Listen to the tape.
Let the Ss get ready to listen to the tape (paper and ball-point pen).
Check the answer: 2 4 1
4. Activities.
The teacher acts several actions and say :”What am I doing?”, help Ss answer: ”I’m opening the door.”
(The other actions: look at someone, clean the window)
Write down the three sentences on the blackboard, and ask the Ss to pay attention to the important words underlined:
n What am I doing?
n I’m opening the door.
n What am I doing?
n I’m looking at him.
n What am I doing?
n I’m cleaning the window.
5. Pairwork.
Ask and answer questions about what people are doing in the picture.
u What’s he doing?
u He’s reading.
The Ss can practice different sentences upon the verbs on the blackboard.
6. Guessing game.
The teacher prepare several pieces of paper and there are different actions on it. Ask a pair of Ss to act it out. (Each pair of Ss choose two pieces of paper and act.)
(The Ss must like to do it, so the teacher can ask many pairs to do this game and, the Ss can be familiar with the Present Progressive step by step. They can have fun in the classroom during this class, it’s the most important.)
7. Self-assessment.
The teacher prepare for the Ss some listening exercises, and play the cassette, let them finish these exercises at once. Then, check the answer. The Ss can understand whether they have learned about the Present Progressive.
8. Do the exercises.
The teacher have the Ss some exercises, and ask the Ss to do at once.
--What’s Li Lei doing?
-- He_____________. ( read )
--What’s his mother doing?
--She_____________. ( write )
--What are they doing?
--They_____________. ( play soccer)
--What are David and Mary doing?
--They_____________. (have dinner)
--What’s Jenny doing?
--She______________. ( run )
(In fact, the Ss don’t have enough time to finish the exercises, so they can go on and finish these exercises after class.
Step 3. Homework
1. Finish the exercises in the class.
2. Make a conversation and act it out with your partner.
Step 4. The end
T: You are very good today, boys and girls! And thank you for listening. Bye.
七年级英语备课教案篇2
教学目标
1. Match the vocabulary: sales assistant. Doctor. Actor. Reporter. Police. Officer. Waiter. Bank clerk. student
2. Master and use: What do you do? What does he do? Does he work in hospital?
教学重难点
重点
1. The vocabulary
2. language: What does she do? She is a doctor.
难点Use the language to ask for the jobs
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Step 1
Oranization1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Oral practice: Games, words that describe jobs, such as exciting, dangerous, boring The students talk about freely
Step 3
Presentation 8’ 1. Let students look at the picture and guess the jobs. The teacher describes the jobs and let students guess what. Ask job does the person have? Where does the person work?
2. Then use explanations and short sample sentences to help students understand what each word means. For example, Exciting means very interesting and very fast-moving.
A police officer has an exciting job.
3. Let students practice. Such as: He is a police officer. It’s an exciting job.
4. Listen to the conversation. What jobs do Betty, Jenny, and Sam want? Then write the jobs below.
5. Listen again. Why are Betty, Jenny, and Sam interested in these jobs? Complete the chart above.
6. Listen to the tape: Listen and number the picture(1-3) below.
Then practise the dialogue.
7. Grammar focus: 1.叫学生口头造句用一些有关职业的句子。争取大部分的同学都有回答的机会，多次重复加大练习。
2. 教师边让学生读句子边解释这些句子的意思。
3. 叫学生口头练习一些有关这方面的句子。
4. 听录音，让学生填写表格，然后再纠正答案。
5. 分组练习，让学生大面积的练习。
6. 让学生朗读Gammar Focus
Step 4
Practice 6’ 7. Read the newspaper want ads. And fill in the blanks with the correct jobs.
One: Wanted: Do you like to work late? Do you like to work hard? Do you like to meet people? If your answer is “Yes”, then we have a job for you as a …… 给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都有机会来表演。
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class Language:
本节课主要是听录音来完成各种对话，充分让学生学会职业的文法以及地点的表达法。 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 test 4’ 1、Self check(见后面) 让学生做后再讲解答案
Step 7 Consolidation 4’ 在这节课例我们主要听录音然后回答问题，让学生充分练习听力，达到会听、会说然后在自己编对话来练习。
Step 8
Homework Read the newspaper more and more. 让学生朗读3A部分的内容。
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
Unit 4 I want to be an actor
七年级英语备课教案篇3
教学目标
知识与技能
(1)熟练掌握下列词汇：
rules, arrive, late, hall, dinning hall, listen, , fight, sorry outside,wear, important, bring, uniform, quiet
(2)熟练掌握下列短语：
dining hall, arrive late for school, (be) on time, listen to music break the rules, in class, be/ keep quiet, a lot of, bring …to…，wear a hat, have to, music players
(3)掌握下列句型：
1. Don't eat in class.
2. You must be on time.
3. Eat in the dining hall.
4. 正确使用情态动词can, can’t
——Can we wear a hat in school?
——Yes, we can./No, we can’t.
5. 能正确使用have to 和 must 谈论规章制度
We must be on time/ We also have to be quiet in the library.
教学重难点
重点：
1) 肯定祈使句是省略掉主语的原形动词开头;
2) 否定祈使句则是在肯定祈使句前加上“don’t”。
3) 情态动词must及have to在用法上的区别。
难点：
掌握祈使句的用法，并能听懂、会说一些简单的祈使句。
教学工具
ppt
教学过程
一.新课预习
1.小组合作学习本课单词，根据汉语写出下列英语单词。
规则_______ 到达_________ 准时___________走廊___________
礼堂_________ 餐厅_______________倾听___________________
听……______________打架_______________抱歉的_____________ 非常重要_____________ 带来;拿来_________________
不得不_____________ 校服;制服_________________
2.试着翻译下列句子。
Don’t arrive late for class. ___________________________________
Don’t run in the hallways. ___________________________________
不要在教室里吃东西。___________________________________
不要在教室里听音乐。___________________________________
二. 情景导入
教师进教室后，使用祈使句请学生们完成一系列动作：
Please stand up/ sit down. Close the door, please. Look at me and listen to me.
Don’t open your books. Don’t talk. Let’s begin our class.
学生听教师的指令完成各种动作，教师也可将指令写到黑板上，让学生从视觉上考察祈使句的特点。
三.合作探究
1.教师出示书上1a 的图片，向学生提问。
指着图上奔跑的男孩提问
T：What’s the boy doing? S: He’s running.
T: Where is he running? S: He’s running in the hallways.(板书，教读)
T：Can you run in the hallways? S: No, I can’t.
T: So please don’t run in the hallways.(板书，教读)
(= You can’t run in the hallways.)
学生跟读数遍，明白祈使句和“can”的表达含意。
T：Why is he running in the hallways? S: He’s late.
T: Oh, he’s late for class.(板书，教读)
You can’t arrive late for class.(板书，教书) = Don’t arrive late for class.
…
on 1a
学生看图，完成1a的内容，检查答案并大声朗读校规。
3. Listening
学生们听录音，完成1b，选出四位学生都违反了哪条校规;听之前，学生要读会英文名。
Check the answers:
4. Pair work
学生朗读1c部分的句型;两人一组对话表演，学生可经过讨论，多说出他们想到的校规，不必只限于书上.
5. Listening
Work on 2a:
First, read the sentences in 2a together.
Ss listen to the recording and check the activities they hear.
Play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
Listen to the recording again. Can Alan and Cindy do these activities? Circle can or can't above.
Check the answers:
6. Pair work
Talk about the rules in 2a.
Let some students come to the front and act out the conversations.
课后小结
点拨总结
1.arrive late for school/ be late for school/ come to school late 上学迟到
2.arrive in/ at + 地点 in class 在课堂上
get to + 地点 in the classroom 在教室里 wear “穿着，戴着” be in + 颜色(穿......颜色的衣服) sound “听起来”系动词后接形容词
3. 祈使句的用法:祈使句是用来表示请求，命令，叮嘱，邀请，劝告等的句子，一般以动词原形开头。
a) V型祈使句(以行为动词开头) Listen to me，please. 请听我说.
b) B型祈使句(以Be开头) Be careful!小心!
c) L型祈使句(以Let开头)Let me help you. 让我帮助你.
d) D型祈使句(以Don’t+动词原形开头) Don’t talk in class.
4、must和have 的区别
must “必须”(强调主观意志);没有人称和数的变化;否定：mustn’t “不准”
have to “必须”(强调客观因素)三人称用：has to; 否定：don’t/ doesn’t have to
5. a lot of= lots of/ many/ much
6. bring sth. to sb.“带…来…”= bring sb. sth.
课后习题
训练评价
一、单项选择
( )1.-- Don’t run in the room. -- ,Uncle.
A. Excuse me B. Sorry C. No
( )2. Peter wear sports shoes for the gym class today.
A. have to B. has C. has to
( )3. Our teacher us not to arrive late for the class.
A. says B. talks C. tells
( )4. -- we have to clean the classroom after school? --Yes, you .
A. Can, can B. Do, have C. Do, do
( )5.You can’t eat outside. It’s dirty.
A. in B. at C. /
2. 完成下列句型转换试题
1)I can play computer games on weekends.(一般疑问句)
_________________________________? Yes, ____________.
2) He has to wear uniform.(变否定句)
He _____ _____ _____ wear uniform.
3) I have to wear sneakers for gym class.(一般疑问句)
_____ you ____ ____ wear sneakers for gym class? Yes, I ____.
4) They have to wash clothes.(提问) ____ do they have ____ ____?
5) You can’t go out on school nights.(换一种表达) _______ go out on school nights.
6) Don’t talk in class.(同上) No _________________________.
七年级英语备课教案篇4
教学目标
1、语言目标
◆ 掌握部分有关电视节目以及表示装饰的词汇，如：soap opera, sitcom, sports show, host, super, agree, hair clip, key ring, belt, wallet etc.
◆ What do you think of…? 句式在不同人称中的使用及其几种不同的答语方式，并能简单陈述理由。
◆ 掌握运用love, like, don’t like, don’t mind, can’t stand恰当表达对有关事物的观点和态度。
2、能力目标
◆ 学会陈述自己的看法和意见。
◆ 学会谈论自己的喜好。
◆ 谈谈流行文化，了解各类电影和电视节目的名称。
◆ 了解一些日常生活用品，描述对其喜好程度。
3、策略目标
利用不同媒体获取相关的学习资源，通过合作、探究的方式学习;学会正确评价自己的学习行为和学习效果。
4、情感目标
◆ 学会客观地评价事物。
◆ 正确表达自己的意见。
◆ 正确认识流行文化。
◆ 了解中西文化在表达自己的观点时存在很大差异——我们比较委婉，而西方人则更直接一些。
教学重难点
1、重点
学习及掌握陈述自己的看法，意见及喜好的词汇和基本句型。
2、难点
正确运用What do you/does he/she think of…?及I love/like/don’t like/don’t mind/can’t stand ... He/She loves/likes/doesn’t like/doesn’t mind/can’t stand ...等句型结构来表达对客观事物的评价。
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Step1 Warming up : Chant
What do you think of talk shows?
I don’t mind them.
What about game shows?
I love them.
Do you like sitcoms?
Yes, I do.
Step 2 Revision: Dialogue show time
注：1. Dialogue show后要鼓励学生给予comments。可以引导学生在以下几方面评价：
What do you think of their dialogue?
Body language
pronunciation
intonation
2.如有许多Pairs想上来show，可以用一个chant确定：
1,2,3,4 Mary is at the kitchen door.
5,6,7,8 Mary is at the garden.
Step 3 Presentation
1. Listen and do 2a, 2b.
借助Dialogue show 及过渡句“Have you seen the sitcom Dumpling King引出听力
2. 做完2a,2b后，问：
What does he think of Dumpling King?
What does he think of Er Bao
Xiao Bao ?
Sitcoms
呈现新的句型。
Step 4 Information exchange
Student A looks at one paper, student B looks at the other paper.(Don’t look at his/her partner’s paper)
运用句型结构：What does Alan/Yang Lin think of these TV shows?交流信息。
Step 5 Task(1)：
Weekend Talk show
学生三人一组，分别扮演角色 host/hostress和guests，电视访谈节目的演示，谈论对不同TV shows的看法，但老师先要给予Talk show的model。
A: Welcome to 9 o’clock weekend Talk show.
We’re talking to….Welcome to the show…
B: Thank you.
A: Do you like to watch TV?
B:
A: What do you think of sports shows?
B:
A: How about…?
B:
A: OK! Thanks for joining us. Next, we’re talking to…
Step 6 Task (2)：Survey time
列举常见TV Shows的名称，调查并统计班内同学对各种节目的观点。四人小组以统计图表的形式(学生可以creative一些，设计各种统计图表)呈现结果，再给TV station写一封调查报告，并提些建议。
统计时，增加句型：I do, too.
I don’t, either.
Step7 Homework
1. Finish your diagram and stick on the board.
2. Finish writing the letter to the TV station.
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
Unit 11 What do you think of game shows?
英语七年级教案(篇7)
年级 Grade 2
教学用具 电脑、录音机、卡片
教学用时 一课时
设计模式 教师：创设情景――激发兴趣――组织活动――指定目标
学生：交流探究――合作活动――锻炼能力――升华习惯
教 材 分 析 学生已学完了全部字母，一些简单的单词和日常用语，为学生提供“字母-单词”的复习游戏素材，巩固已学到的知识从而引出新课. It’s raining是新标准英语第一模块第二单元的内容，本单元是围绕天气状况为题材展开的。在日常生活中，“天气”与我们密切相关，如何问答天气便是本单元所要学习的交际用语，是教学大纲要求掌握的重要语言功能项目之一。
学生分析
本节课授课的对象是小学二年级的学生，初学英语的孩子对语言运用意识不强，设计一些简单的句子进行提问，激发学生对英语学习的兴趣。同时学生的认知水平比较好，能读出所学词语，具有较强的可塑性。
设计理念
英语课程的教育理念中指出“要面向全体学生、关注学生的情感，营造宽松民主和谐的教学氛围，倡导任务型的教学途径。本节课就是根据这些理念进行设计的，以培养兴趣为前提，让学生把所学的知识运用到实践当中，让学生通过感知、体验、实践以及合作探究来实现学习目标。
教学目标
(一)知识目标： 1. 以游戏的方式检验学生对26个字母的掌握情况，要求能听懂及正确识别。
2. 词汇: hot, cold, raining, snowing, windy,
sunny以及如何问答天气的交际用语
3. 争做小小天气预报员。
4. 学唱英文歌曲
(二)能力目标：本节课通过课堂活动，完成了听、说、读、写、唱的技能训练，使学生通过感知、实践、合作
完成任务，感受成功，提高语言实践运用能力。
(三)德育目标：通过这节课让学生懂得要爱护我们周围的环境，爱护树木，从自我做起，保护地球美丽的家园。
(四)情感目标：在学习中，我注意使用鼓励性的语言，帮助学生克服紧张的心理，提高自信心。
教学重点 词汇: hot, cold, raining, snowing, windy, sunny以及如何问答天气的交际用语
教学难点 对What’s the weather like?的答语，It’s raining. It’s snowing也可说成It’s rainy. It’s snowy.
教学流程
一.谈话引入
1. 铺垫，知识回忆
想一想，到现在你学会了哪些英语知识?说说看，比一比谁学到的多?
2. 激趣，字母游戏：创设情境，发现问题
大家学会的可真不少!今天，我们就应用所学会的一些字母做一个游戏，你们喜欢吗?
老师给每个同学发一张卡片，上面有一些字母，下面同学们仔细听，把老师读到的字母划掉，看看你发现了什么?每个小组第一桌的同学到前边来做，看哪组分高。
师读：C、D、I、J、K、M、N、Q、S、U、V、X、Y
Now, tell me please. What do you find?
生：单词flag, go, zoo, bag, pen.
师：OK! You are very clever.
完成的同学得一朵小红花。
师：这里有一个单词同学们没有找到，那就是我们今天学习的weather.
( 游戏能为小学生的英语学习带来快乐，使枯燥、机械的句型操练变得生动，活泼，因此，在教学过程中，应恰当的把游戏引入课堂，寓教于乐。)
二.利用多媒体学习新单词
1. 练习生词的读音
课前让学生查找与天气有关的单词，学生通过搜索资料提高搜索信息的能力，培养学生探究能力，然后进行六个单词的重点学习,在听完磁带后，找学生读单词，纠正他们的发音。
( 利用电教多媒体能使课堂更加生动，直观，图文并茂，使学生能够在轻松愉快的气氛中学习。)
2. 交际英语
运用What’ the weather like? 就图片上的天气进行提问。
( 英语要作为交际工具来教，也要作为交际工具来学，做到学用统一。)
3. 图片与句子相连接，学生走到微机前进行连接。
三.争做小小天气预报员
就各地区的天气进行预报。
( 兴趣是的老师，而兴趣来自好奇，来自体验，提供实践机会，让他们参与表演，这既符合儿童好动、表现欲强的年龄特点，同时也会进一步加强对所学知识的掌握。)
四.学唱歌曲
1. 运用肢体语言教学生词snoring, bumps his head,确信学生理解歌曲的意思。
( 肢体语言，可使学生在语言和动作、表情间建立直接的联系，从而获得形象的感知，能收到良好的效果。)
2. 建立超连接，运用新标准动画光盘教唱歌曲，在演唱中配以相应的动作，然后小组间展开竞赛，看哪个小组唱得，为唱得的学生发小红花，并鼓励他们把新学的歌曲唱给爸爸妈妈听。)
( 小学生性格天真活泼，特别喜欢唱歌，在演唱中配以相应的动作会更引起他们的参与和投入，在英语歌曲中学新词，既减轻了学生的心理负担，又能在轻松愉快的气氛中学到新知识。)
五.总结升华
以沙尘暴为例对学生进行爱护周围环境的思想教育，让我们的天空更蓝。
六.课堂小结
在活动中复习巩固了所学知识，掌握了如何问答天气，以及在愉快的气氛中学会了一首英文歌曲，增强了学英语的自信。
七.课后作业
1. 观察本周天气情况，进行预报。
2. 如果你想了解天气的更多知识，请同学们登陆 ,老师相信你一定会成为一名出色的天气预报员。
八.课后反思
本节课在教学模式中采用任务型教学法，在授课过程中应用了游戏法，分组合作法、启发诱导法，演唱教学法。教学设计按照 老师：创设情景――激发兴趣――组织活动――指定目标 学生：交流探究――合作活动――锻炼能力――升华习惯，使全体同学在充分的活动中学到了新的知识，取得了较好的教学效果。
九. 板书设计
It is raining.
Word list:
Hot、cold、raining、snowing、windy、sunny
Sentences：
What is the weather like?
It is raining. (snowing、rainy、snowy)
英语七年级教案(篇8)
Lesson Plan for speaking—Module 6 An invitation to the cinema
Unit 1 would you like to go to the cinema?
教学年级：初一上册 教学版本：外研社
课题： Unit 1 Would you like to go to the cinema? 授课时间：30minutes
Teaching aims
Knowledge aims：
Words:invitation,cinema,would,film,stadium,match,star,team, Friday,Monday,Sunday,Thursday,Tuesday,Wednesday,Staturday, invite
Sentence structure：Would you like to go to do sth
→Let’s go in ∕on + time
Ability aim：To understand conversations about inviting sb to the cinema
Teaching importance：Learn to invite sb to do sth
Teaching procedure:
Step 1 Warm up
Lead in ：Greet→
T: Before beginning our class I will ask you some questions .Ok? What day is it today?
S:“…
T:“How about yesterday and tomorrow?”
S:“…”
T：〝Then, Do you like watching TV?〞
S：“…”
T：〝OK，every student almost likes it .How about film ,such as 《神话》《无极》《让子弹飞》?→〝Do you know my meaning?〞
S：“…”
T：OK ,Can you guess the meaning of film ?OK, Which film star do you like best?
S: “…”
T: film star. “ where do you like seeing films?”
S:…
T:OK,电影院→cinema When will you go?
S:“…”
T: Teach some new words about a week.
T ：“Look at the blackboard→Title .If you want to invite sb to go to the cinema you can use this sentence.”Then lead into the new word ‘invite and invitation’ teaching the new words for two times.
Step 2
Show some pictures about some new words and teach students for two times.
T ：“ look at this picture. What is this ”
Students answer it in Chinese and teacher teaches the new words.
T:“OK, stop here please open your books and turn to page 36. Then ,please finish the part 1.You have only 1 minute to finish it .Please quickly!”
T：OK ,stop !I think you should have finished!
Step 3
Teach the sentence structure and some new words.
At first teacher shows above pictures and says：“OK ，We will learn the new sentence about invitation. If we want to invite sb to go to the cinema how we can express it ?”
S：“…”
Teacher lead in the →Would you like to go to the cinema ﹙ with me ﹚?
T：“ Very good, then if we accept otherˊs invitation we can say → That is a good idea .If you want to give some advice on time you can say “Let’s go in the evening on Saturday”
Then teacher shows the new words about every day of a week and teach them.
Then play a game to practice the new sentence.
Step 4
Practice and listen to the tape.
T：“Please look at the part 6 and listen to the tape for three times.” The first listening students get some main idea on the conversation. The second listening students begin checking these sentences. The last listening to the tape and students see the text and read it after the tape.
Then check the answer and teacher teaches the text for one time.
T：“ All students are divided into two groups to read the text. One group acts as Damming and the other group acts as Tony. After the first reading, the two group exchange.”
Step 5 discussion
Two students in a group make 2 minutes conversation. You can do it like the text. Requirements：When ,Where, What, Why .
After it teacher asks some groups to show .Then teacher gives the task.
英语七年级教案(篇9)
我今天要说的内容是义务教育课程标准实验教科书《英语》七年级上册第二单元《is this your pencil》第一课时，p7，p8。
一、说教材
1、教学内容：义务教育课程标准实验教科书《英语》七年级上册第二单元《is this your pencil》第一课时，p7，p8。
2、在教材中的地位：本课在教材中不可忽视，起到承上启下的作用。预备单元已学过what’s this in english?及其回答，现在进一步用what’s that in english?及其回答，接着用这个句型介绍出本课中的大量词汇。通过词汇进而学习is this /that your pencil?及其肯定、否定回答。在这个过程中充分复习并运用my, your, his, her, 等形容词性物主代词。指示代词this, that及这一句型为第三单元及以后学习一般疑问句打下基础。并且这一课时的教材在原来的基础上使学生更明白英语的学习是在相互交流中有趣地进行，听、说、读、写、用就是学习的过程。为学生学习以后的内容打下坚实的心理、方法和知识的基础。
3、教学目标
⑴知识目标：
通过演示及情景教学法，使用句型what’s this /that in english? it’s a book. 使学生掌握重点词汇：pen, pencil, pencil case, pencil sharpener, book, eraser,ruler, backpack, dictionary等，并且学会对物品的所属进行提问、回答，在问答中会熟练运用my, your, his, her等形容词性物主代词，即：is this/that my/your/his/her pen? yes, it is. / no, it isn’t.
⑵能力目标：
a: 通过情景对话、游戏及题目的训练，使学生学会根据场景就学习用品询问物主，并正确运用对应的英语表达方式。
b: 通过听力及上下文来培养学生基本的逻辑思维能力及听音辨词的基本功。
⑶情感目标：
a: 教学的过程是老师与学生及学生与学生的交往、互动、共同发展的过程，在参与、表演、运用的过程中，培养学生学习英语的兴趣。
b: 结合物体学习单词和句型的同时，培养学生的视觉美感。
c: 通过询问、辨认物主，倡导学生要保管好自己的学习用品。
4、教学重点、难点
重点词汇和句型：
a: 重点词汇：pen, pencil, pencil case, pencil sharpener, book, eraser, ruler, backpack, dictionary, that等。
b: 重点句型：
what’s this /that in english?
it’s a pencil. / it’s an eraser.
is this/that my/your/his/her pen?
yes, it is. / no, it isn’t.
难点：进一步运用my, your, his, her等形容词性物主代词，明确this/that 这两个指示代词的用法。
二、说教法
在教学中，倡导学生主动参与、勇于开口、大胆表演，培养学生获得新知识及口语、听力，分析和解决问题，以及交流与合作的能力。为此，主要采用情景演示、师生互动、生生互动、分组合作、多媒体辅助教学等方法，充分体现出学生是学习的主体，教师是教学的组织者、引导者与合作者。
三、说学法
指导学生转变学习方式，既要主动地富有个性地学习，锻炼口语、听力，又提倡合作与交流来共同运用新知识进行语言表达，即自主探究式，促进学生创新意识的形成与听、说、读、写、用能力的培养。
四、说教学过程
课前准备：这节课为了方便、实用起见，课前准备好26个字母的卡片及钢笔、铅笔、铅笔盒、卷笔刀、书、橡皮擦、尺子、词典、背包(挂在墙上)等物体，使学生觉得自然有趣。
1、复习
为了突出本课的重点，突破难点，激发和培养学生学习英语的兴趣，丰富教学内容和形式,提高课堂教学效果,复习分作两项：
a: 姓名每个人都很熟悉，每个同学又都会说，所以首先通过问答姓名，让学生在复习中运用my, your, his, her等形容词性物主代词。首先对个别同学进行提问：what’s your english name, please?
该同学回答：my name’s gina.
转而问另一名同学：what’s her english name?
该同学回答：her name is gina.
然后用同样的方法引出：his name is tom.
接着把这些问答进行于教师与小组之间，小组与小组之间，教师与全体同学之间，这样每个同学都敢于开口，都有机会开口，而且能自然地运用my, your, his, her等词了。
b: 通过几个单元的学习，学生对26个字母是再熟悉不过了。所以复习的第二项就是运用字母卡为新内容作准备，具体是：
举起一个字母卡放在胸前，问某同学：what’s this in english?
同学回答：it’s “a”.
接着用这个动作再问几个字母，然后手远远地举起一个字母卡，问：
what’s that in english?
同学回答：it’s “b”.
然后用举在胸前和举在远处这两个动作继续向个别、小组或全体同学问：“what’s this/that in english?”学生们初步理解了“this”与“that”的区别了。问完之后，顺势向同学们提议为老师唱“abcsong”，这样不单复习了旧知，还活跃了课堂气氛。
设计意图:基于学生生理和心理特点，遵循语言学习的规律，创造条件让学生对他们感兴趣的问题用英语进行表达，使他们有学好英语的信心。
英语七年级教案(篇10)
今天我说课的内容是七年级英语上册第五单元第一课时，这一课时可分为三部分，一是要求掌握一些球类运动的名词，英语单词是学好英语的基础，只有掌握大量的英语单词，在丰富知识的同时，才能提高应用语言的能力；第二部分是听力训练；第三部分是口语训练Do you have a ……句型。下面我将从以下几个方面阐述说课内容。
本教材倡导语言教学的交互性和实用性，为学生提出了自然的、有意义的语言环境，本单元主要是学习动词have的一般现在时的用法：Let引导的祈使句及形容词的使用，一般现在时是第五第六两个单元的重难点、学会第三人称单数形式的灵活使用，同时也复习了第三单元名词复数的变化规则，谈论对各种球类运动的看法，从而引出形容词的用法，用层层递进的方式，逐步扩大和加深，具有很强的逻辑性，整体感。
鉴于以上的分析，为更好地实现目标教学，进而提高课堂效益，我结合教材特点及学生实际情况为这一节课拟定了以下目标。
1、知识目标帮助学生掌握三会、四会单词如have soccer ball tennis racket＝bat ping-pong volleyball basketball does让学生掌握句型的灵活运用
2、能力目标让学习形成良好的听说习惯，同时让学生了解一些与球类运动相关的信息
3、德育目标通过向学生展示一些体育明星的图片，让学生热爱运动、热爱祖国、激发学生的爱国荣誉感。
教学重点：本课的第一部分是一幅展示新功能在实际生活中运用的图画，图中引出了本课在操练新知识所需用到的重点单词，新的句型也呈现在人物头上的气泡中，本课的重点是让学生学会使用Do you have……的句型。
根据教材需要，采取多种教学方法交互使用权用，精讲巧练，由浅入深、由易到难，提高学生的学习兴趣，展开循序渐进地深化教学内容，展开以教师为主导、以学生为主体师生双边活动，主要以直观教学、交际性教学和任务型教学，贯穿整个教学过程，增加了直观性和趣味性，激发学生兴趣，活跃课堂气氛，提高教学效果。
1、科学地储备大量的学生感兴趣的课外知识，学生掌握了感受兴趣的丰富的课外知识才能进行良好、积极的语言交流。
2、掌握大量的语法知识、学生要交流就必须了解语言规律，丰富词汇、熟悉语法规则，学会由各个话题而展开的交际内容，这样学生的知识才记得深刻，灵活度大
教师在课堂上所讲的语言难点、重点、学生应及时整理、再次认识并积极使用。
学生要经常听录音，听教师讲英语，听同学们讲英语、这对学习英语是很有好处的，
在课堂上，学生要积极参与教师设计的每个教学活动，要大胆开口、课后和同学进行及时交流，把书本知识变成自己的知识和语言，只有多练才能实现脱口说英语的目的。
我的课堂的整体设计分四个主要步骤进行，即新授、听力、巩固、和作业
1、出示几幅图来出现我们这节课将会学习的球类运动的名词以及相应的名星：在教学单词的过程中，用What is this in English和How do you spell it句型和学生进行双边活动，掌握本课所学习的新单词
2、学习新句型，通过图，来学习I have a soccer ball……句型，并让学生多读、多理解I have……句型
3、让学生整体复习巩固一下我们这节课所学习的新单词，让学生会读，并掌握拼写。
4、让学生以唱的形式复习新单词及I have……句型，如Soccer ball . Soccer ball.I have a Soccer ball.
为活跃课堂气氛，请个别学生为下列句子谱曲并唱如basketball. basketball.I have a basketball.这一部分学生比较感兴趣，学生可随意发挥，也可根据自己所熟悉的歌曲的歌谱来唱出这些句子。
5、新授I have……句型的否定句，一般疑问句、肯定回答和否定回答。
Do you have a computer game?
Do you have a baseball bat?
Do you have a ping－pong bat?
1、通过猜猜我有什么的活动。巩固句型Do you have……及回答
New words:
Soccer ball basketball volleyball baseball football tennis ping-pong bat＝racket
I have a soccer ball:
Do you have a soccer ball?
本节课设计本着讲练结合的要求，把教学的内容目标化、课堂教学交际化、而且在设计充分考虑学生的现状，保证所有学生能够积极参与，能重视知识传授与能力培养相结合，循序渐进、因材施教、符合以教师为主导、学生为主体、以会学生为主旨、以练为主线的四主要求。
课堂教学中主要使用的形成性评价，其主要目的不是为了选拨少数优秀学生，而是为了挖掘学生的学习潜能，提高学生的学习兴趣，在课堂教学中，我便用的评价形式有两种：学生互评和教师评价。
